54501607-Atoll-2-8-3-User-Manual-MW-E2

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

User ManualMicrowave Links

2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010

Atoll User Manual

Contact Information

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2

© Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk

The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied underthe terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any formwithout prior authorisation from Forsk.

The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective regis-tering parties.

About the Atoll User DocumentationThe Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear,self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the featuresthat Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enablehim to use all of Atoll’s features and functions.

The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual containsinstructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment andthe tools available.

Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers31700 BlagnacFrance

[email protected]@forsk.com+33 (0) 562 74 72 10+33 (0) 562 74 72 25+33 (0) 562 74 72 11

WebSales and pricing informationTechnical supportGeneralTechnical supportFax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker DriveSuite 3100Chicago, IL 60606USA

[email protected][email protected]+1 312 674 4846+1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655)+1 312 674 4847

Sales and pricing informationTechnical supportGeneralTechnical supportFax

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building,No.66 Jianzhong Road,Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone,Guangzhou, 510665,People’s Republic of China

[email protected]+86 20 8553 8938+86 20 8553 8285

WebInformation and enquiriesTelephoneFax

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 3

Atoll User Manual


Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Table of Contents.......................................................................................................................... 5

1 The Working Environment .................................................................................................... 13

1.1 The Atoll Work Area .................................................................................................................... 131.1.1 Working with Document Windows .................................................................................................... 141.1.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window................................................................................................ 14

1.2 The Explorer Window ................................................................................................................. 151.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.......................................................................................... 151.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window .................................................................................................. 161.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer........................................................... 161.2.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer .......................................................................................... 16

1.3 Working with Objects .................................................................................................................. 171.3.1 Using the Object Context Menu ....................................................................................................... 17

1.3.1.1 Renaming an Object ................................................................................................................... 171.3.1.2 Deleting an Object ...................................................................................................................... 171.3.1.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object ....................................................................................... 18

1.3.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ............................................. 181.3.2.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links ................................................................................ 191.3.2.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse .................................................................................................. 191.3.2.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location ............................................................................................. 191.3.2.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse ............................................................ 191.3.2.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse ....................................... 201.3.2.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse ................................................. 20

1.3.3 Display Properties of Objects ........................................................................................................... 211.3.3.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................................. 211.3.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................ 25

1.4 Working with Maps....................................................................................................................... 261.4.1 Changing the Map Scale .................................................................................................................. 26

1.4.1.1 Zooming In and Out .................................................................................................................... 261.4.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area.................................................................................................... 271.4.1.3 Choosing a Scale........................................................................................................................ 271.4.1.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels................................................................................. 27

1.4.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window ....................................................................................... 271.4.3 Using the Panoramic Window .......................................................................................................... 271.4.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object........................................................................................... 281.4.5 Measuring Distances on the Map ..................................................................................................... 281.4.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ................................................................................................... 281.4.7 Displaying the Map Legend .............................................................................................................. 291.4.8 Using Zones in the Map Window...................................................................................................... 29

1.4.8.1 Using a Filtering Zone................................................................................................................. 291.4.8.2 Using a Computation Zone ......................................................................................................... 301.4.8.3 Using a Focus Zone.................................................................................................................... 311.4.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.............................................................................................. 311.4.8.5 Using a Printing Zone ................................................................................................................. 331.4.8.6 Using a Geographic Export Zone ............................................................................................... 33

1.4.9 Editing Polygons, Lines, and Points ................................................................................................. 341.4.9.1 Adding a Vector Layer ................................................................................................................ 341.4.9.2 Creating Polygons, Lines, and Points......................................................................................... 351.4.9.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ................................................................................... 351.4.9.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar.................................................................. 361.4.9.5 Editing a Point............................................................................................................................. 361.4.9.6 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu .................................................... 37

1.4.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results............................................................................................ 371.4.10.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format .................................................. 381.4.10.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format .................................................. 381.4.10.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions.................................................................................... 39

1.4.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image ................................................................................................... 391.4.12 Copying a Map to Another Application ............................................................................................. 40


Atoll User Manual

1.4.13 Map Window Pointers .......................................................................................................................40

1.5 Working with Data Tables .........................................................................................................411.5.1 Opening a Data Table .......................................................................................................................411.5.2 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields...............................................................................42

1.5.2.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields ...................................................................................421.5.2.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table ...........................................................................421.5.2.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table.....................................................................43

1.5.3 Editing the Contents of a Table.........................................................................................................431.5.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table .......................................................441.5.5 Defining the Table Format.................................................................................................................441.5.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables .........................................................................................................47

1.5.6.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ........................................................................................471.5.6.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ..................................................................................47

1.5.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents ..............................................................................491.5.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files...........................................................................................................491.5.9 Importing Tables from Text Files.......................................................................................................501.5.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files ..........................................................................................................511.5.11 Importing Tables from XML Files ......................................................................................................52

1.6 Printing in Atoll................................................................................................................................521.6.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports .....................................................................................................521.6.2 Printing a Map ...................................................................................................................................52

1.6.2.1 Printing Recommendations .........................................................................................................531.6.2.2 Defining the Printing Zone ...........................................................................................................531.6.2.3 Defining the Print Layout .............................................................................................................54

1.6.3 Previewing Your Printing...................................................................................................................551.6.4 Printing a Docking Window ...............................................................................................................56

1.7 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data..................................................................................561.7.1 Grouping Data Objects......................................................................................................................56

1.7.1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ..........................................................................561.7.1.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu ...........................................................................................571.7.1.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site ..............................................................................................581.7.1.4 Advanced Grouping.....................................................................................................................581.7.1.5 Examples of Grouping .................................................................................................................59

1.7.2 Sorting Data ......................................................................................................................................601.7.2.1 Sorting Data in Tables .................................................................................................................601.7.2.2 Advanced Sorting ........................................................................................................................61

1.7.3 Filtering Data.....................................................................................................................................621.7.3.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection ...........................................................................................621.7.3.2 Advanced Data Filtering ..............................................................................................................631.7.3.3 Restoring All Records..................................................................................................................641.7.3.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples .....................................................................................................64

1.7.4 User Configurations ..........................................................................................................................661.7.4.1 Exporting a User Configuration ...................................................................................................671.7.4.2 Importing a User Configuration ...................................................................................................67

1.7.5 Site Lists............................................................................................................................................671.7.5.1 Creating a Site List ......................................................................................................................681.7.5.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window .......................................................................681.7.5.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window .............................................................................681.7.5.4 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ............................................................................................681.7.5.5 Editing a Site List.........................................................................................................................691.7.5.6 Filtering on a Site List ..................................................................................................................69

1.7.6 Folder Configurations........................................................................................................................691.7.6.1 Creating a Folder Configuration ..................................................................................................701.7.6.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration .......................................................................................701.7.6.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration ..............................................................................701.7.6.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration.................................................................................................701.7.6.5 Importing a Folder Configuration .................................................................................................701.7.6.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration...................................................................................................71

1.7.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders.................................................................................................711.7.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone.................................................................................................71

1.8 Tips and Tricks ...............................................................................................................................721.8.1 Undoing and Redoing .......................................................................................................................721.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders ...........................................................................................................721.8.3 Searching for Objects on the Map.....................................................................................................72

1.8.3.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ....................................................................................721.8.3.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property .................................................................731.8.3.3 Searching for a Point on the Map ................................................................................................73


Table of Contents

1.8.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information........................................................................................... 731.8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer........................................................................... 741.8.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 741.8.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll .................................................................................................................... 75

2 Starting an Atoll Project .......................................................................................................... 79

2.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project .............................................................. 79

2.2 Creating an Atoll Document .................................................................................................... 792.2.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ............................................................................ 79

2.2.1.1 Templates Available ................................................................................................................... 792.2.1.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ...................................................................... 802.2.1.3 Defining a New Atoll Document .................................................................................................. 81

2.2.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................... 832.2.2.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................... 832.2.2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database ...................................................................... 842.2.2.3 Working With a Document on a Database.................................................................................. 852.2.2.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database ..................................................................... 862.2.2.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ............................................ 87

2.3 Making a Backup of Your Document .................................................................................. 902.3.1 Configuring Automatic Backup ......................................................................................................... 902.3.2 Recovering a Backup ....................................................................................................................... 91

2.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects .................................................................... 91

3 Managing Geographic Data ................................................................................................ 95

3.1 Geographic Data Types ............................................................................................................ 95

3.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats ................................................................................ 96

3.3 Importing Geo Data Files.......................................................................................................... 963.3.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ......................................................................................... 973.3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ......................................................................................... 983.3.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data..................................................................................................... 99

3.3.3.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type .............................................................................. 993.3.3.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database .................................................................................. 100

3.3.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ............................................................................. 1013.3.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders ............................................................................................... 1023.3.6 Embedding Geographic Data ......................................................................................................... 1023.3.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File ................................................................................... 102

3.4 Digital Terrain Models .............................................................................................................. 103

3.5 Clutter Classes............................................................................................................................. 1033.5.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes .............................................................................................. 1043.5.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties ................................................................................................... 1043.5.3 Adding a Clutter Class.................................................................................................................... 1053.5.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes ............................................................................................ 1053.5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ............................................................................ 105

3.6 Clutter Heights ............................................................................................................................. 106

3.7 Contours, Lines, and Points .................................................................................................. 1063.7.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ........................................................................................ 1063.7.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer ................................................................................. 1063.7.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.......................................................................................... 107

3.8 Scanned Images ......................................................................................................................... 1073.8.1 Importing Several Scanned Images ............................................................................................... 1073.8.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images ...................................................................... 108

3.9 Geoclimatic Maps ....................................................................................................................... 1083.9.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties .......................................................................................... 1093.9.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics.................................................................................................... 109

3.10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data........................................................................................... 1093.10.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data ......................................................................................... 1093.10.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations ............................................................................. 110

3.10.2.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ...................................................... 1113.10.2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area ............................. 1113.10.2.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area ....................................... 111

3.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data .......................................................................... 112

3.12 Geographic Data Sets .............................................................................................................. 1123.12.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set .............................................................................................................. 112


Atoll User Manual

3.12.2 Importing a Geo Data Set ...............................................................................................................113

3.13 Editing Geographic Data .........................................................................................................1133.13.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps..............................................................................................................114

3.13.1.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon ........................................................................................................1143.13.1.2 Editing Clutter Polygons ............................................................................................................1143.13.1.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ........................................................................1153.13.1.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons ..........................................................................................................115

3.13.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps................................................................................................................115

3.14 Saving Geographic Data .........................................................................................................1163.14.1 Saving Modifications to an External File .........................................................................................116

3.14.1.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File................................................1163.14.1.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ...........................................................117

3.14.2 Updating the Source File.................................................................................................................1173.14.3 Combining Several Files into One File............................................................................................1183.14.4 Exporting an Embedded File...........................................................................................................1183.14.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File ...........................................................................................119

4 Antennas and Equipment.....................................................................................................123

4.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers ......................................................................................123

4.2 Defining Antennas.......................................................................................................................1234.2.1 Creating an Antenna .......................................................................................................................1234.2.2 Importing Microwave Antennas.......................................................................................................1254.2.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ..............................................................................................1254.2.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns .............................................................................................126

4.3 Microwave Equipment...............................................................................................................1274.3.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll................................................................................................1284.3.2 Importing Microwave Equipment.....................................................................................................1324.3.3 Advanced Configuration..................................................................................................................132

4.3.3.1 Digital Hierarchies .....................................................................................................................1324.3.3.2 Interference Reduction Factor ...................................................................................................1334.3.3.3 Theoretical Graphs ....................................................................................................................136

4.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables .................................................................................1374.4.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables.................................................................................1374.4.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable ..................................................................................138

4.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility .....................................1384.5.1 Defining Compatibility Manually ......................................................................................................138

4.5.1.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table ................................................1384.5.1.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table .................................................139

4.5.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility.........................................................................................1394.5.2.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility .............................................1394.5.2.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ..............................................140

5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands ......................................................145

5.1 Microwave Frequency Bands ................................................................................................1455.1.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band ............................................................................................................1455.1.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band .......................................................................................................1465.1.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band............................................................................................................146

5.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands ...................................................................146

5.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands .........................................................1475.3.1 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band ..................................................................................148

6 Managing Calculations in Atoll ........................................................................................151

6.1 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects .....................................................1516.1.1 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ............................................................................1516.1.2 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model............................................................................153

6.2 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives .........................1546.2.1 Microwave Link Classes..................................................................................................................1546.2.2 Defining Performance Objectives....................................................................................................154

6.2.2.1 Defining Quality Objectives .......................................................................................................1556.2.2.2 Defining Availability Objectives .................................................................................................156

6.3 Defining Calculation Parameters .........................................................................................1566.3.1 Global Parameters ..........................................................................................................................156


Table of Contents

6.3.2 Link Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 1596.3.2.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link ................................................. 1596.3.2.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links ........................................................ 1636.3.2.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ........................................... 165

7 Microwave Link Project Management ....................................................................... 173

7.1 Designing a Microwave Link Network .............................................................................. 173

7.2 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites ..................................................................... 1747.2.1 Creating Sites ................................................................................................................................. 174

7.2.1.1 Site Description......................................................................................................................... 1757.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Site ..................................................................................................... 175

7.2.2 Site Survey Tools ........................................................................................................................... 1767.2.2.1 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site .................................................................. 1767.2.2.2 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites .............................................................. 1767.2.2.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites ............................................................................. 1797.2.2.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites .......................................................... 1807.2.2.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site ................................................................................. 181

7.2.3 Search Tools for New Sites ............................................................................................................ 184

7.3 Creating Microwave Links ...................................................................................................... 1857.3.1 Definition of a Microwave Link........................................................................................................ 1857.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ........................................................................................ 1887.3.3 Defining Port Parameters ............................................................................................................... 1897.3.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template............................................. 1907.3.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates ............................................................................................ 190

7.3.5.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template................................................................... 1917.3.5.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template .......................................................................... 1917.3.5.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template........................................................................................ 191

7.3.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map .......................................... 1917.3.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links ................................................................................... 1927.3.8 Checking Data Consistency ........................................................................................................... 1927.3.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ............................................................................. 192

7.4 Analysing the Path Profile ...................................................................................................... 1937.4.1 Displaying the Path Profile ............................................................................................................. 193

7.4.1.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile ............................................................................................. 1937.4.1.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance......................................................................................... 1947.4.1.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options................................................................... 1947.4.1.4 Zooming In on the Profile.......................................................................................................... 1947.4.1.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile.............................................................................................. 1957.4.1.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile............................................... 1957.4.1.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values ................................................................................. 197

7.4.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights............................................................................... 2007.4.2.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse ......................................................... 2007.4.2.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights....................................................................................... 2007.4.2.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights............................................................. 200

7.4.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater.......................................................................................... 2017.4.3.1 Description of a Passive Repeater ........................................................................................... 2017.4.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater ............................................................................... 2027.4.3.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................... 202

7.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability ................................................................................ 2037.5.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link ................................................................................................ 203

7.5.1.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins ......................................................................... 2047.5.1.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget ....................................................................................... 2047.5.1.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters .................................................................. 2057.5.1.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display............................................................................. 2067.5.1.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report......................................................................... 206

7.5.2 Analysing Microwave Links ............................................................................................................ 2067.5.2.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active .......................................................................................... 2067.5.2.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report ....................................................................... 2077.5.2.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets........................................................................... 2077.5.2.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity............................................................................... 208

7.5.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ................................................................................. 2087.5.3.1 Creating Multi-hops................................................................................................................... 2087.5.3.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ........................................................................... 210

7.6 Studying Reflection.................................................................................................................... 2107.6.1 Displaying Reflection ...................................................................................................................... 2117.6.2 Analysing Reflections ..................................................................................................................... 212


Atoll User Manual

7.6.2.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report.................................................................................2127.6.2.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report ...............................................................................2147.6.2.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters ................................................................................214

7.6.3 Solutions Against Reflections..........................................................................................................215

7.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels ...................................................................................2167.7.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities ...........................................................................................217

7.7.1.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map ............................................................................................2177.7.1.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities .............................................................................................217

7.7.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse ..........................................................................2187.7.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search..................................................................................2187.7.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser ............................................................................2197.7.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products............................................................................220

7.8 Analysing Interference ..............................................................................................................2217.8.1 Interference Reduction Factor.........................................................................................................221

7.8.1.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually ..................................................................................................2217.8.1.2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant.....................................................................................222

7.8.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations............................................................................................2247.8.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link ..................................................2247.8.4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links .................................................225

7.8.4.1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report........................................................................2257.8.4.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links ..............................................................226

7.8.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity.....................................................................................2267.8.6 Displaying Interference on the Map ................................................................................................226

7.9 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................2277.9.1 Point-to-Multipoint Links..................................................................................................................227

7.9.1.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link ............................................................................................2277.9.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ............................................................................................2287.9.1.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active ...........................................2297.9.1.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally................................................2297.9.1.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ..............................................................2297.9.1.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse ..................................2307.9.1.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link........................................................2307.9.1.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link.............................................................................................2307.9.1.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub................................................................2307.9.1.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse....................................231

Index..................................................................................................................................................... 233


Chapter 1

The Working Environment

Chapter 1: The Working Environment

1 The Working EnvironmentThe Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to createand define your microwave-planning project in a single application. You can save the entire project as a single file, or youcan link your project to external files.

Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements, with the ability to have several document windows open at the sametime, support for drag-and-drop, context menus, and support for standard Windows shortcuts, for example, for cutting andpasting. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print func-tionality, with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window, parts of it, or only certain objects. Atollalso provides other tools, such as a search tool to locate either a site, a point on the map, or a vector.

The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a documentarranged in folders.

Using the Explorer window, you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites, calculations, etc., as well asgeographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM), and clutter classes. You can, for example, define various studiesor configure the parameters or display of data objects.

The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables, allowing you to manage large amounts ofdata. You can sort and filter the data in a table, or change how the data is displayed. You can also use the table featureto enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table.

The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. You canchange the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they aredisplayed. You can also export the current display definition, or configuration, to use it in other documents.

This chapter explains the following topics:

• "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13• "The Explorer Window" on page 15• "Working with Objects" on page 17• "Printing in Atoll" on page 52• "Working with Maps" on page 26• "Working with Data Tables" on page 41• "Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data" on page 56• "Tips and Tricks" on page 72.

1.1 The Atoll Work AreaThe Atoll work area, shown in Figure 1.1 on page 14, consists of the main window where the map window and data tablesand reports are displayed and the Explorer window. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document,arranged in folders. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15.

Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The tools open in separate windows, some of which can be dockedinto the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1.1 on page 14).


Atoll User Manual

1.1.1 Working with Document WindowsWhen you have one Atoll document open, you can have several document windows open at the same time. You canresize, maximise, and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application.

As well, you can tile document windows, in order to display all of them at the same time, or cascade them, in order todisplay the title bar of each document window.

To tile document windows:

• Select Window > Tile.

To cascade document windows:

• Select Window > Cascade.

1.1.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll WindowOnly document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. Other windows and tools, such as the Explorer window,display the content of the active document. They are not part of the individual Atoll document, but part of the working envi-ronment and, when you switch to a different document, they will display the content of the active document.

You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. You can also choose to remove them from their position andfloat them over the Atoll working environment.

To display a window:

• On the View menu, select the name of the window.

To close a window:

• Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the docking window, thisbutton can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.

You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimis-ing the window.

To maximise a window in its docking area:

• Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, thisbutton can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.

To minimise a window in its docking area:

• Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, this buttoncan be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.

You can leave a window in its docking area, or you can have it float over the working environment, allowing you to maxim-ise the amount of area for document windows or other windows.

Figure 1.1: Atoll user interface

Explorer window (docked)

Panoramic window(floating)

Point Analysis window(docked)

Toolbar

Document window (map)

Workspace



To float a window:

• Double-click the docking window title bar. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the workingenvironment.

To dock a window:

• To return the window to its previous docked location, double-click the docking window title bar.

Or

• Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area.

1.2 The Explorer WindowThe Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document,arranged in folders. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. You canmodify items at the folder level, with changes affecting all items in the folder, or you can access and edit items individually.As well, most folder contents can also be accessed in a table, allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information.For information on working with tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41.

In this section, the following are described:

• "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15• "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16• "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16• "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16.

1.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window TabsThe Explorer window has three tabs:

• The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. Depending on the modulesinstalled with Atoll, the Data tab has the following folders:

- Sites - Antennas - Transmitters - Predictions - UMTS Parameters, CDMA2000 Parameters, GSM/GPRS Parameters, WiMAX 802.16d Parameters, WiMAX

802.16e Parameters, or LTE Parameters- UMTS Simulations, CDMA2000 Simulations , WiMAX 802.16d Simulations, WiMAX 802.16e simulations, or

LTE Simulations- Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) - Hexagonal design - Microwave links - CW Measurements and Drive test data

• The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. The number of folders depends on thenumber and types of geographical data types (vector data, scanned images, etc.) you import or create:

- Clutter classes - Clutter heights - Digital Terrain Model - Population data - Any other geo data map - Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA, UMTS HSPA, CDMA2000)

• The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules. Itcontains:

- A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models:

- Longley-Rice- Okumura-Hata- Cost-Hata- Standard Propagation Model- ITU 526-5- ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93)

Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. To prevent the window from docking as you move it, press CTRL as you drag the docking window.

Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document; they remain the same no matter which document you open.


Atoll User Manual

- ITU 1546- WLL - Microwave Propagation Model- Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)

- The AFP models available in your Atoll installation.- Any additional module created using the API.

1.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer WindowThe Explorer window has three tabs; each tab has objects and folders containing objects.

To move from one tab to another:

• Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window.

A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name.

To expand a folder to display its contents:

• Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name.

1.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the ExplorerYou can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map. This allows you to hide one type of object so that anothertype of object is more plainly visible. For example, you could hide all predictions but one, so that the results of one predic-tion are more clearly displayed.

To hide an object on the map:

1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.

2. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. The check box appears cleared ( ) and theobject is no longer visible on the map.

1.2.4 Working with Layers Using the ExplorerIn Atoll, the map is made of objects arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) arethe most visible on the screen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible(see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers(see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23).

To move a layer up or down:

1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.

2. Click and drag the object to its new position. As you drag the object, a horizontal black line indicates where theobject will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1.2).

Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window; it will still be taken into consideration during calculations.

Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the

folder name. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ), it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects.



1.3 Working with ObjectsIn Atoll, the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. Most objects in Atollbelong to an object type. For example, a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter.

Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object andselecting the operation from the context menu.

In this section, the following are explained:

• "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17• "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18• "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

1.3.1 Using the Object Context MenuIn Atoll, an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that arecommon to most objects. In this section, the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained:

• Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17.• Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17.• Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18.

1.3.1.1 Renaming an ObjectYou can change the name of an object in Atoll.

To rename an object:

1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears.

2. Select Rename from the context menu.

3. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name.

1.3.1.2 Deleting an ObjectYou can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map.

To delete an object:


2. Select Delete from the context menu. The selected object is deleted.

Figure 1.2: Moving a layer

Note: Before you print a map, you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. For more information, see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53.

Note: In Atoll, objects such as sites are named with default prefixes. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.


Atoll User Manual

1.3.1.3 Displaying the Properties of an ObjectYou can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue.

To open the Properties dialogue of a data object:


2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.

Switching Between Property Dialogues

You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas, sites, etc.) in the same folder or subfolder in the

Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue:

• : jump to the first item in the list

• : jump to the previous item in the list

• : jump to the next item in the list

• : jump to the last item in the list

If you have made any changes to the properties of an item, Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switchingto the next Properties dialogue.

You can use this feature, for example, to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening theProperties dialogue. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. For example:

• If transmitters are grouped by site, you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters).• If transmitters are grouped by a flag, you can switch only within this group.• If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag, you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity

and the same flag.

The browse buttons are not available:

• When creating a new item. • When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. • For repeater properties.• For propagation model properties.

The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section.

1.3.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the MapIn a complex microwave or -planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might bevisible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from themap. You can also change the position of a site by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.


• "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19• "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19• "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19• "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to

the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20• "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.

Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map, it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. When a site is selected, the site (and its name) is

surrounded by a black frame ( ). When a transmitter is selected, both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19).



1.3.2.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave LinksIf there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth, Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link.

To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth:

1. In the map window, click thelinks. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth(seeFigure 1.3).

2. Select thelink from the context menu.

- When you select a microwave link, both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ).

1.3.2.2 Moving a Site Using the MouseYou can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue, or by using the mouse.

To move a site using the mouse:

1. Click and drag the site to the desired position. As you drag the site, the exact coordinates of the pointer’s currentlocation are visible in the Status bar.

2. Release the site where you would like to place it. By default, Atoll locks the position of a site. When the positionof a site is locked, Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site.

3. Click Yes to confirm.

1.3.2.3 Moving a Site to a Higher LocationIf you want to improve the location of a site, in terms of reception and transmission, Atoll can find a higher location withina specified radius from the current location of the site.

To have Atoll move a site to a higher location:

1. Right-click the site in the map window. The context menu appears.

2. Select Move to a Higher Location.

3. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue, enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and clickOK. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius.

1.3.2.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Propertiesdialogue, or you can modify it on the map, using the mouse.

To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse:

Figure 1.3: Selecting one microwave link

Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly, you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue.

1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, move the Microwave Radio Linksfolder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Usingthe Explorer" on page 16.

2. On the map, click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify.

3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). An arcwith an arrow appears under the pointer.

4. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.

The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the statusbar. It is defined in degrees, with 0° indicating north.


Atoll User Manual

1.3.2.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the MouseBy default, antennas are placed on the site. However, antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site, but a shortdistance away. In Atoll, you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dyparameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Propertydialogue. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position. You can also modify the position ofthe antenna on the map, using the mouse.

To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse:

1.3.2.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse

In Atoll, you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse.

To select another site for the link extremity on the map:

5. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle.

The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radiotab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue.

Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth, you can undo your changes by using

Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo, by pressing CTRL+Z, or by clicking in the toolbar)

to undo the changes made.

1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, move the Microwave Radio Linksfolder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with LayersUsing the Explorer" on page 16.

2. On the map, click the link extremity you want to move.

3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). Across appears under the pointer.

4. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relativeto the site.

The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far rightof the status bar.

5. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to thedesired position.

The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab ofthe Microwave Link Properties dialogue.

Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo, by pressing CTRL+Z, or by clicking

in the toolbar) to undo the changes made.

1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, move the Microwave Radio Linksfolder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with LayersUsing the Explorer" on page 16.

2. On the map, click the link extremity you want to move.

3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). Across appears under the pointer.

4. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map.

5. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site, indicating it isselected.

The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of theMicrowave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed.

Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo, by pressing CTRL+Z, or by clicking

in the toolbar) to undo the changes made.



1.3.3 Display Properties of ObjectsIn Atoll, most objects, such as sites, belong to an object type. How an individual object appears on the map depends onthe settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. The Display tab is similar for all object types whoseappearance can be configured. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tabof its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1.4).

In this section, the display options are explained, followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working onyour Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25).

1.3.3.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects

When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object, the Display tab will only show the options applicable toan individual object (see Figure 1.5).

To define the display properties of an object type:

1. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears.


3. Select the Display tab. Depending on the object type, the following options are available:

- "Defining the Display Type" on page 22- "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23- "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23- "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23- "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24- "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24

4. Set the display parameters.

Figure 1.4: The Display tab for Sites

Figure 1.5: The Display tab for an individual site


Atoll User Manual

5. Click OK.

Defining the Display Type

Depending on the object selected, you can choose from the following display types: unique, discrete values, value inter-vals, or automatic.

To change the display type:

1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

2. Select the display type from the Display Type list:

- Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. By defining a unique symbol for an object type,objects of different types, for example, sites, are immediately identifiable.

i. To modify the appearance of the symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogueappears.

ii. Modify the symbol as desired.

iii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.

- Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. This display typecan be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. For example, you could use thisdisplay type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites.

i. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.

ii. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands availa-ble, see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22.

iii. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogueappears.

iv. Modify the symbol as desired.

v. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.

- Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field.This display type can be used, for example, to distinguish population density, signal strength, or the altitudeof sites.

i. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.

ii. Define the ranges directly in the table below. For an example, see Figure 1.7 on page 24.

iii. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands availa-ble, see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22.

iv. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table. The Symbol Style dialogue appears.

v. Modify the symbol as desired.

vi. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.

Using the Actions Button

The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in"Defining the Display Type" on page 22.

To access the Actions menu:


2. Click the Actions button. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands:

- Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table.- Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table.- Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals, Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table

before the threshold selected in the table.- Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals, Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after

the threshold selected in the table.- Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style.- Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type, you select

Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. Enter the upper and lower limitsof the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively, and enter a value in the Interval box.Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. The value intervals will be deter-mined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour.

Notes:

• When you create a new map object, for example, a new site, you must click the Refresh button

( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type.• You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in

the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.



When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type, you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and anEnd Colour.

- Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. Select Export if you wantto export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file, so that you can share them with otherusers or use them in other documents.

Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types

You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and some object types, such as clutter classes,to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map.

To change the transparency:


2. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to makeit less transparent.

Defining the Visibility Scale

You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only if the scale, as displayed on the Map toolbar, iswithin this range. This can be used to, for example, prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at acertain scale.

Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display, and for printing and previewing printing. They do not affect whichobjects are considered during calculations.

To define an object visibility range:


2. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box.

3. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box.

Defining the Object Type Label

For most object types, such as sites, you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayedwith the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that youadd.

To define a label for an object type:


2. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1.6).

3. Select the fields which you want to display in the label:

a. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type, select the field in the Available Fields list and

click to move it to the Selected Fields list.

b. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Selected Fields list

and click to remove it.

c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objectswill be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

4. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.

Figure 1.6: Defining a label


Atoll User Manual

Defining the Object Type Tip Text

For most object types, such as sites and microwave links, you can display information about each object in the form of atool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in thatobject type’s data table, including from fields that you add.

In the Explorer window, the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites, Links, Multi-Hops, andPoint to Multipoint folders, and their subfolders.

To define tip text for an object type:


2. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1.6).

3. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip:

a. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type, select the field in the Available Fields list

and click to move it to the Selected Fields list.

b. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Selected Fields list

and click to remove it.

Once you have defined the tool tips, you must activate the tool tip function before they appear.

To activate the tool tip function:

• Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object.

Adding an Object Type to the Legend

You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atolldocument’s legend. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. For information on displaying or hiding objects,see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.

In Figure 1.7, on the Display tab of a signal level prediction, the intervals defined are:

• Signal level >= -65 red • -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals)• Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage.

The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window.

With value intervals, you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. If there is no infor-mation entered in this column, the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead.


2. Check the Add to legend box. The defined display will appear on the legend.

To display the Legend window:

• Select View > Legend. The Legend window appears.

Note: For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.

Note: For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23.

Figure 1.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend



You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting anoption in the atoll.ini file. For more information about setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.

1.3.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of ObjectsIn this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used:

• "Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies" on page 25• "Shading - Signal Level Study" on page 25.

Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies

When doing a best server prediction, Atoll calculates, for each pixel on the map, which server is best received. If theselected display type for transmitters is "Automatic," Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of thetransmitter that is best received on that pixel. This way, you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received oneach pixel. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study.

In Figure 1.8, the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values," with the site name as the chosen value. The difference incolour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel. In Figure 1.9, the transmitter displaytype is "Automatic." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surroundingit, the study results are also immediately visible.

To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type:

1. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears.


3. Select the Display tab.

4. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type.

5. Click OK.

6. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results.

Shading - Signal Level Study

Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. On the map, these value intervals appear as differencesof shading. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the resultseasier to read or more relevant to your needs. For example, you can change the range of data displayed, the intervalbetween each break, or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible.

In this example, Figure 1.10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. However, if you aremore interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm, you can change the shading to display only those values. Theresult is visible in Figure 1.11.

Figure 1.8: Value interval display type Figure 1.9: Automatic display type


Atoll User Manual

To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed:

1. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. The context menuappears.



4. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. The Shading dialogue appears.

5. Change the value of the First Break to "-80". Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105."

6. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue.

7. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes.

1.4 Working with MapsAtoll has the following functions to help you work with maps:

• "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26• "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27• "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27• "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28• "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28• "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28• "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29• "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29• "Editing Polygons, Lines, and Points" on page 34• "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39• "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40.• "Map Window Pointers" on page 40.

1.4.1 Changing the Map ScaleYou can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out, by zooming in on a specific area of the map, or by choosing ascale.

Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the VisibilityScale" on page 23).

1.4.1.1 Zooming In and OutAtoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. When you zoom in or out on the map, you do so based onthe position of the cursor on the map.

To zoom in on the map:

1. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).

2. Click the map where you want to zoom in.

Figure 1.10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm Figure 1.11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm

Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++, by selecting Zoom In from the View menu, or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward.



To zoom out on the map:

1. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).

2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out.

1.4.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific AreaTo zoom in on a specific area of the map:

1. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W).

2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.

3. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button, Atoll zooms in on the selected area.

1.4.1.3 Choosing a ScaleTo choose a scale:

1. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( ) on the Map toolbar.

2. Select the scale from the list.

If the scale value you want is not in the list:

1. Click in the scale box ( ) on the Map toolbar.

2. Enter the desired scale.

3. Press ENTER. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale.

1.4.1.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom LevelsAtoll saves the last five zoom levels, allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas.

To move between zoom levels:

• Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←).

• Once you have returned to a previous zoom level, click the Next Zoom button ( ) to return to the latest zoom

level (or press ALT + →).

1.4.2 Moving the Map in the Document WindowYou can move the map in the document window using the mouse.

To move the map in the document window:

1. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D).

2. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction.

1.4.3 Using the Panoramic WindowThe Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. A dark rectangle indicates whatpart of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window, helping you situate the displayed area in relationto the entire map.

You can use the Panoramic window to:

• Zoom in on a specific area of the map• Resize the displayed map area • Move around the map.

To zoom in on a specific area of the map:

1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on.


To resize the displayed map area:

1. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle).

2. Drag the border to its new position.

Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–, by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu, or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward.


Atoll User Manual

To move around the map:

1. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle).

2. Drag the rectangle to its new position.

1.4.4 Centring the Map Window on an ObjectYou can centre the map on any selected object, for example, a transmitter, a site, or on any zone in the Zones folder onthe Geo tab of the Explorer window. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept.

You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.

To the map window on a selected object:

1. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.

2. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu.

1.4.5 Measuring Distances on the MapYou can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. The Distance Measurement tool alsogives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measuredistance along a line with several points. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure), theazimuth of each segment between two points, and the total distance.

To measure a distance on the map between two points:

1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.

2. Click the first point on the map once. As you move the pointer away from the first point, Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer witha line.

3. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.12):

- The distance between the two points- The azimuth between the two points.

To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points:

1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.

2. Click the first point on the map once.As you move the pointer away from the first point, Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer witha line.

3. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point, where you will have tochange direction on the line.

4. When you reach the last point on the line, the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.12):

- The total distance between the first point and the last point- The distance between the second-last point and the last point- The azimuth between the last two points.

1.4.6 Displaying Rulers Around the MapYou can display rulers around the map in the document window.

To display rulers:

1. Select Tools > Options.

2. In the Options dialogue, click the Coordinates tab.

Tip: If you want to quickly find an object, such as a site, on the map, you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command.

Figure 1.12: Measurement data in the status bar

Total distance betweenfirst and last point

Azimuth between second-last and last point

Distance between second-last and last point



3. Under Display rulers, select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window.

4. Click OK.

1.4.7 Displaying the Map LegendYou can display a map legend. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. Forinformation on adding object types to the legend, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24.

To display the legend:

• Select View > Legend.

1.4.8 Using Zones in the Map WindowOn the Geo tab of the Explorer window, Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones. The zones are a type ofpolygons, which can be created and modified in the same way as contours, lines, or points. Zones can be used to defineareas of the map for the following purposes:

• Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on theData tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used incalculations such as coverage predictions, etc.

• Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consid-eration in calculations (i.e., link budget, interference analysis, etc.,).

• Focus Zone: With the focus zone, you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on whichyou want to generate reports and results.

• Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed.• Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a

bitmap.


• "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29• "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30• "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31• "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31• "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33• "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33.

1.4.8.1 Using a Filtering ZoneThe filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorerwindow to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coveragepredictions, etc. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisationof data objects on the map clearer.

The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a zone, it will be takeninto account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected.You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.

1.4.8.1.1 Creating a Filtering ZoneTo create a filtering zone:

1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.

3. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder.

4. Select Draw from the context menu.

5. Draw the filtering zone:

a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.

b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.

c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.

Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, if you have drawn a zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. For example, if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone, the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions, even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.


Atoll User Manual

The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. On theData tab of the Explorer window, any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special

icon ( ), to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered.

You can also create a filtering zone as follows:

• Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in theVector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone.

• Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it andselecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu.

• Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an adminis-trative area, you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zonefolder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.

• Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Windowfrom the context menu.

Once you have created a filtering zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on thepolygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.

1.4.8.2 Using a Computation ZoneThe computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. When you make a link budget oryou study interference, Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the currentfilter parameters), and intersects the computation zone.

When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network youare currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied, Atoll reduces both the timeand computer resources necessary for calculations.

If there is no computation zone defined, Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered andfor the entire extent of the geographical data available.

The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a computationzone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorerwindow is selected. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.

1.4.8.2.1 Creating a Computation ZoneTo create a computation zone:

1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.

3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears.


5. Draw the computation zone:




The computation zone is delimited by a red line.

You can also create a computation zone as follows:

• Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in theVector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone.

• Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it andselecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu.

• Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an adminis-trative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computa-tion Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.

• Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to MapWindow from the context menu.

Once you have created a computation zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information onthe polygon editing tools, see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.

Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.



1.4.8.3 Using a Focus ZoneUsing the focus zone , you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made.It is impor-tant not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the sites andmicrowave links calculated in link budget, interference studies, etc. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filtersthe displayed results.

Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computationzone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, insteadof displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated.

Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, if you have drawn a focuszone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorerwindow is selected. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports.

1.4.8.3.1 Drawing a Focus ZoneTo define a focus zone:



3. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. The context menu appears.


5. Draw the focus:




A focus zone is delimited by a green line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geotab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.

You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways:

• Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in theVector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone.

• Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selectingUse as > Focus Zone from the context menu.

• Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an adminis-trative area, you can import it and use it as a focus zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folderon the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.

• Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Windowfrom the context menu.

1.4.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing ToolsAtoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone, focus zone, and filtering zones. You canedit these zones by editing the points that define them, by combining several polygons, or by deleting parts of the polygonsthat make up these zones. When you no longer need the zone, you can delete it from the map.

Note: You can save the computation zone, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, in the following ways:

- Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on export-ing the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configura-tion" on page 67.

- Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window andselecting Export from the context menu.

Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon. The polygons of a focus zone must notintersect or overlap each other.

Note: You can save the focus zone , so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, in the following ways:

- Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting thefocus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67.

- Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the FocusZone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from thecontext menu.


Atoll User Manual

The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlayingpolygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clock-wise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order.


• "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32• "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33.

1.4.8.4.1 Editing Polygon ZonesYou can edit polygon zones in several ways. Before you can edit a polygon zone, you must first put it in editing mode.

To put the polygon zone in editing mode:



3. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit.

4. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.

You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections:

• "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32• "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32• "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33.

Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone

To edit a point of a polygon zone:

1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32.

2. Select the polygon zone. You can now edit it by:

- Moving a point:

i. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Drag the point to its new position.

- Adding a point to the polygon zone:

i. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes

( ).

ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the polygon zone border atthe position of the pointer.

- Deleting a point from a polygon zone:

i. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.

Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar

In Atoll, you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. The filtering, computa-tion, and focus zone polygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying poly-gons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwiseorder, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order.

To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar:

1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32.

2. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons:

- : To combine several polygon zones:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone.

iv. Double-click to close the polygon zone.

v. Draw more polygon zones if desired. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours.If polygon zones overlap, Atoll merges them.

- : To delete part of the selected polygon zone:

Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.



i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button ( ).

ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where youwant to begin drawing the area to delete.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area.

iv. Double-click to close the area. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour.

- : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.

iv. Double-click to close the polygon. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygonsand deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap.

- : To split the selected polygon into several polygons:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.

iv. Double-click to close the polygon. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected pol-ygon and creates a new polygon.

Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu

When you are editing polygon zones, you can access certain commands using the context menu.

To edit a polygon zone using the context menu:

1. Click the polygon zone you want to edit.

2. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following:

- Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. The Propertiesdialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone.

- Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer.- Move:

i. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.

ii. Move the contour, line, or point.

iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point.

- Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode.

- Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map.

1.4.8.4.2 Removing a Polygon ZoneWhen you no longer need a polygon zone, you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects.

To remove a polygon zone:



3. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove.

4. From the context menu, select Delete Zone. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now dis-played.

1.4.8.5 Using a Printing ZoneThe printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. For information on using the printing zone, see "Defining thePrinting Zone" on page 53.

1.4.8.6 Using a Geographic Export ZoneIf you want to export part of the map as a bitmap, you can define a geographic export zone. After you have defined ageographic export zone, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the mapas a raster image.

Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

To define a geographic export zone:



3. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. The context menu appears.


5. Draw the geographic export zone:

a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone.

b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. When you release themouse, the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners.

The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibilitycheck box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still betaken into account.

You can also create a geographic export zone as follows:

• Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in theVector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone.

• Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking itand selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu.

• Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, you can import it and use it as a geographicexport zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selectingImport from the context menu.

• Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to MapWindow from the context menu.

Once you have created a geographic export zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more informationon the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.

1.4.9 Editing Polygons, Lines, and PointsAtoll uses different types of polygons, lines, and points in the map window. For example, the zones such as the compu-tation and focus, described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29, are specific types of polygons. Another typeof polygon, called contours, can along with lines and points, be used to add additional information to geographic data.

Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons, lines, and points. You can move or delete the pointsthat define polygons, lines, and points. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them, by combining severalpolygons, or by deleting parts of the polygons.

Polygons, including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differen-tiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polyg-onal areas are in clockwise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order.

When you no longer need the polygon, line, or point, you can delete it from the map.

In this section, the different ways of editing polygons, lines, and points are explained:

• "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34• "Creating Polygons, Lines, and Points" on page 35• "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35• "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36• "Editing a Point" on page 36• "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37.

1.4.9.1 Adding a Vector LayerYou can add vector objects such as polygons, lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creatinga vector layer. You can also modify certain geographic data maps, for example, geoclimatic maps, by adding a vector layerto them and afterwards adding polygons, lines and points. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps byadding a vector layer, see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115.

Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.

Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.



To add a vector layer to the Geo tab:

• Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar.

Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

For information on adding vector objects such as contours, lines, and points to the vector layer, see "Creating Polygons,Lines, and Points" on page 35.

1.4.9.2 Creating Polygons, Lines, and PointsOnce you have created a vector layer, as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34, you can add polygons, lines,and points to it.

To add a polygon, line, or point to a vector layer:

1. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. The context menu appears.

2. Select Edit from the context menu. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available.

If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible, select View > Vector Edition Toolbar.

3. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar:

New Polygon:

a. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.

b. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.

c. Double-click to close the contour.

New Rectangle:

a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle.

b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle.

c. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners.

New Line:

a. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line.

b. Click each time you change angles on the line.

c. Double-click to end the line.

New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point.

4. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar.

1.4.9.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and LinesYou can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer.

To edit the shape of polygons and lines:

1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menuappears.


3. Select the contour or line. You can now edit by:

- Moving a point:


Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 17.

Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map,, you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. For more information, see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115.

Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.


Atoll User Manual


- Adding a point to a contour or a line:

i. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. The pointer changes

( ).

ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the contour border or lineat the position of the pointer.

- Deleting a point from a contour or a line:



1.4.9.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the ToolbarIn Atoll, you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar.

To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar:



3. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons:

- : To combine several contours:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.

iv. Double-click to close the contour.

v. Draw more contours if desired. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If con-tours overlap, Atoll merges them.

- : To delete part of the selected contour:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button ( ).

ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you wantto begin drawing the area to delete.

iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area.

iv. Double-click to close the area. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour.

- : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one.


iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contoursand deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap.

- : To split the selected contour into several contours:

i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one.


iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected con-tour and creates a new contour.

1.4.9.5 Editing a PointTo edit a point:






3. Select the point. You can now edit by:

- Moving:

i. Click the point you want to move. The pointer changes ( ).


- Deleting a point:

i. Click the point you want to delete. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The point is deleted.

1.4.9.6 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context MenuWhen you are editing contours, lines, and points, you can access certain commands using the context menu.

To edit a vector object using the context menu:

1. Click the vector object you want to edit.

2. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following:

- Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map.- Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line.- Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour.- Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point.- Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line.- Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer.- Move:

i. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.

ii. Move the contour, line, or point.

iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point.

- Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. - Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour, line, or point. The

Properties dialogue has two tabs:

- General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer, the Surface of the object, and anyProperties of the contour, line, or point.

- Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour,line, or point.

1.4.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction ResultsIn Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you canexport in BMP, TIF, JPEG 2000, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD orGRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©,or AGD formats. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application.

When you export a coverage prediction in vector format, the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassingthe coverage. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format, you can export the entire coverage prediction, oryou can export a defined area of the coverage prediction.

All coverage types can be exported, however, you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverageprediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a trans-mitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). In this case, only the coverage area of a single transmittercan be exported in raster format.

You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. Whenyou export more than one coverage prediction, Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictionsto be exported.


• "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38• "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38• "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39.


Note: Only the commands relevant to the selected contour, line, or point are displayed in the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

1.4.10.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector FormatTo export a coverage prediction in vector format:

1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Predictions folder.

3. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.

4. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list.

If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format:

a. If desired, under Coordinate Systems, change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported.

b. If desired, change the Resolution of the exported coverage. The default resolution is the resolution of the cov-erage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue).

c. If desired, move the Smoothing slider, or enter the percentage in the text box, to define how much Atollsmooths the exported coverage.

5. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results.

1.4.10.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster FormatTo export a coverage prediction in raster format


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Predictions folder.

3. You can export the entire coverage prediction, the geographic export zone, or part of the coverage prediction.

To export the entire coverage prediction:

- Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.

To export the geographic export zone, define the geographic export zone:

a. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.

c. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. The context menu appears.

d. Select Draw from the context menu.

e. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle thatwill define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define thegeographic export zone. When you release the mouse, the geographic export zone will be created from therectangle defined by the two corners.

The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visi-bility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed butwill still be taken into account.

f. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.

To export part of the coverage prediction:

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction.

b. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export.

4. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.

5. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list.

6. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported.

7. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. The Raster Export dialogue appears.

a. Under Region, select the area to export:

- The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered bythe study,

- The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone, or

Note: The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. For information on displaying objects in the map window, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.

Note: The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. For information on displaying objects in the map window, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.



- The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone.

b. If desired, move the Smoothing slider, or enter the percentage in the text box, to define how much Atollsmooths the exported coverage.

c. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results.

1.4.10.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage PredictionsIf you have several coverage predictions that you want to export, you can export them at the same time.

To export several coverage predictions at the same time:


2. Right-click the the Predictions folder. The context menu appears.

3. Select Export Coverages from the context menu. The Coverage Export dialogue appears.

4. In the Coverage Export dialogue, select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want toexport. By default, Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selectedon the Data tab of the Explorer window.

5. Under Options, you can define the following parameters:

- Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button

( ) to navigate to it.- Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in.- Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box, Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each

exported coverage prediction.- Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions.

6. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. The selected coverage predictions are saved in theselected folder.

1.4.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic ImageYou can save a map as a graphic image.

To save a map as a graphic image:

1. Click the Select an area button ( ) in the Map toolbar.

2. Define the area to save:

a. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.

b. Drag to the opposite corner.

3. Select File > Save Image As. The Map Export dialogue appears.

4. In the Map Export dialogue, select the zone that you wish to save as an image. You can select:

- Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1.- Geographic Export Zone- Printing Zone

5. Click Export. The Save As dialogue appears.

6. In the Save as dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save astype list.

The following file formats are supported: TIF, BIL, BMP, and ArcView Grid (TXT). If you wish to use the saved fileas a digital terrain model, you should select the TIF, BIL, or TXT format. When saving in BIL format, Atoll allowsyou to save files larger than 2 Gb.

7. Click Save. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears.

8. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways:

Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll, the file is

converted using the selected coordinate system.• You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for

example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitterattribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a singletransmitter can be exported in raster format.

Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time, Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration. The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats.


Atoll User Manual

- Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale, select Scale, enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. Ifyou wish to export the image with rulers, select Include Rulers.

- Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size, select Pixel Size, and enter a pixel size in the text box.

9. Click OK.

1.4.12 Copying a Map to Another ApplicationYou can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application.

To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application:

1. Click the Select an area button ( ) in the Map toolbar.

2. Define the area to copy:

a. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.

b. Drag to the opposite corner.

3. Select Edit > Copy Image. The Copy Image dialogue appears.

4. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways:

- Select Use Screen Resolution- Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres.

5. Click OK.

6. Open the application into which you want to paste the image.

7. In the new application, select Edit > Paste Special.

8. In the Paste Special dialogue, select Picture (Enhanced Metafile).

9. Click OK. The area of the map, including the rulers, is pasted as an image into the new document.

1.4.13 Map Window PointersIn Atoll, the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. Each pointer is described below:

Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model, you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image.

Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers, or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection.

Appearance Description Meaning

Selection arrowThe zone selection pointer indicates that, on the map, you can define a zone to

print or copy and, in the Panoramic window, you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. To define a zone, click and drag diagonally.

Polygon drawing pointer

The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links, draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export

zones, or draw vector or raster polygons on the map. To draw a polygon, click once to start, and each time you change angles on the border defining the

outside of the polygon. Close the polygon by clicking twice.

Rectangle drawing pointer

The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones, or draw vector or raster

rectangles on the map. To define a zone, click and drag diagonally.

Hand The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map.

Zoom toolThe zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out

at the location of the mouse pointer

Zoom areaThe zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking

and dragging to define the area.

PencilThe pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone, by clicking once to start the polygon, once to create each corner, and by double-clicking to

close the polygon.



1.5 Working with Data TablesAtoll stores object data (sites, antennas, microwave links, etc.) in the form of tables, containing all their parameters andcharacteristics. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables.

You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. When you create a new column, you cancreate a default value for a field you create. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user canchoose when filling in the field.

You can filter, sort, and group the data contained in these tables, and view a statistical analysis of the data. You can alsoexport the data or import data into the Atoll data tables.


• "Opening a Data Table" on page 41• "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42• "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43• "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44• "Defining the Table Format" on page 44• "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47• "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49• "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49• "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50• "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51• "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52.

1.5.1 Opening a Data TableTo open a data table:

1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.

3. Select Open Table from the context menu.

DeletionThe deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal

clutter zone by clicking its border.

Position indicator

The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a

point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.

Select/create points

The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by

clicking on one of the edges and dragging. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. You can right-click to open a context

menu to delete a point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.

Microwave link start

End

The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. Once you have created the first point, the

microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link.

Multi-hop or point-to-

multipoint microwave link

The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. In the case of a multihop link, each subsequent click creates another point in the link. In the

case of a point-to-multipoint, each subsequent link creates anew point, connected to the hub by a link.

Rotate hub antenna of point-to-

multipoint link

The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna.

Measurements on the map

The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement. As you move the pointer, the distance between the

first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar.

Terrain section

The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the

second point. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab.

Appearance Description Meaning


Atoll User Manual

1.5.2 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table FieldsThe data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set ofcolumns, each corresponding to a field. In this section, the following functions are explained:

• "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42• "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42• "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43

1.5.2.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table FieldsThe fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue.

To access an object type’s table fields:

1. In the Explorer window, open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.

2. Right-click the table in the map window. The context menu appears.

3. Select Table Fields from the context menu. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and addor delete new ones.

The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1.13):

- The Name of the field in the database (Name). - The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). - The Type of the field. - The maximum Size of the field.- The Default value of the field.- The Group to which the field belongs. When opening an Atoll document from a database, you can select a

group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields.

1.5.2.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data TableYou can add a custom field to any object type’s data table.

To add a custom field to an object type’s data table:

1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42.

2. Click Add. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1.14).

3. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes:

- Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database- Group: If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll doc-

ument from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database,instead of loading all custom fields.

- Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. - Type: Select a type for the field (text, short integer, long integer, single, double, true/false, date/time, or cur-

rency)- Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. Enter a size in characters.- Default Value: If you want, enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this

object type.- Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. You can create

a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box, separating each list item with a hard return.

Figure 1.13: The Table tab



4. Click OK to return to the object type table.

1.5.2.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data TableYou can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an objecttype’s data table, as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42.

To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table:

1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42.

2. Select the custom field that you want to delete.

3. Click Delete. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table.

1.5.3 Editing the Contents of a TableTo edit the contents of a table:


2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.

3. Select Open Table from the context menu.

4. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1.15).

5. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. Your changes are automatically saved.

Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue.

Figure 1.14: The Field Definition dialogue

Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. Make sure that you are not deleting important information.

Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable, the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted.

Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field, you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1.16) or enter a new value.


Atoll User Manual

1.5.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a TableYou can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object, for example, a site, antenna, transmitter, or cell, from its datatable.

To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object:

1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.

2. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see.

3. Select Record Properties from the context menu.

1.5.5 Defining the Table FormatAtoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. You can change theformat of the data table by:

• "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45• "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45• "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45• "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46• "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46• "Moving Columns" on page 46

Figure 1.15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables

Figure 1.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables

Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. To avoid editing the record when you double-click, double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself.



Formatting the Column Headers


2. Select Format > Header Format. The Format dialogue appears.

3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs:

- Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour.- Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground

colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header.- Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header.- Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.

4. Click OK.

Formatting Table Columns


2. Select Format > Column Format. The Format dialogue appears.

3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs:

- Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour.- Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground

colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header.- Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header.- Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.

4. Click OK.

Changing Column Width or Row Height

You can change the column width and row height in a data table. When you change the column width, you change thewidth only for the selected column. When you change the row height, however, you change the row height for every rowin the table.

To change the column width:


2. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1.17).

To change the row height:


2. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1.18).

Figure 1.17: Changing column width

Figure 1.18: Changing row height


Atoll User Manual

Displaying or Hiding a Column

You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide.

To display or hide a column:


2. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1.19).

3. To display a column, select its check box.

4. To hide a column, clear its check box.

5. Click Close.

Freezing or Unfreezing a Column

In Atoll, you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontallythrough the table. For example, while scrolling through the Sites table, you might want to have the Name column alwaysvisible. You can keep this column, or any other column visible, by freezing it.

To freeze a column:


2. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. Click and drag over several headers to select more than onecolumn to freeze.

3. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men.

To unfreeze columns:

• Select Format > Unfreeze columns.

Moving Columns

In Atoll, you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order.

To move a column:


2. Select the header of the column you want to move. Click and drag over several headers to select more than onecolumn to move.

Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu.

Figure 1.19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue

Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu.

Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns.

Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table.



3. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. As you drag the column, the position the columnwill occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1.20).

1.5.6 Copying and Pasting in TablesIn Atoll, you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C), Cut (CTRL+X), and Paste (CTRL+V)commands on the Edit menu. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the samedata into several cells.

In this section, the following is explained:

• "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47• "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47.

1.5.6.1 Copying and Pasting a Table ElementYou can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element, pasting it into a new row and editing the detailsthat are different.

To create a new element by copying and pasting:


2. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row.

3. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row.

4. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row.

5. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. Atoll, creates a new element from the copied data.The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element, preceded by "Copy of." You can edit thisname.

1.5.6.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several CellsYou can paste the same data into several cells, using Fill Up or Fill Down.

To paste the same data into several cells:


2. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data(see Figure 1.21).

Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent.

Figure 1.20: Moving columns

Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear.

Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name.


Atoll User Manual

3. Copy into the selected cells:

- To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Down (seeFigure 1.22).

- To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Up (seeFigure 1.23).

Figure 1.21: Selecting the cells

Figure 1.22: Copying the contents of the top cell

Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell



1.5.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table ContentsYou can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells.

To view a statistical analysis of table contents:


2. Select the column data you want to analyse:

To view a statistical analysis of an entire column:

- Click the column title. The entire column is selected.

To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column:

- Select the cells you want to analyse. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging tothe last cell of the selection you want to analyse, or by clicking the first cell, pressing SHIFT and clicking thelast cell. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column sepa-rately.

3. Right-click the selection of cells. The context menu appears.

4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1.24).

The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected. If you leave the Statistics dialogue open,you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. The contents of the Statisticsdialogue are updated automatically.

1.5.8 Exporting Tables to Text FilesYou can export entire Atoll data tables, or selected columns, to ASCII text files (in text, TXT, and Comma SeparatedValue, CSV, formats) and to MS Excel files.

To export a table:


2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears.

3. Select Export from the context menu. The Export dialogue appears. You can see how the exported table willappear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1.25).

Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways, allowing you to select only certain data. For more information, see "Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data" on page 56.

Figure 1.24: The Statistics dialogue


Atoll User Manual

4. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data.

5. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list.

6. Select a Field Separator from the list.

7. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export. You can display all the fields belonging toa table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. You can select contiguous fields by clickingthe first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRLand clicking each fields separately.

a. To select a field to be exported, select the field in the Available Fields box and click to move itto the Exported Fields list. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported.

b. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields, select the field in the Exported Fields list and click

to remove it.

c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The fieldsat the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table.

8. Click Export. The Save As dialogue appears.

9. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list.

10. Click Save to export the table.

You can export the Sites, Links, Multi-Hops, and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or asubfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E.

For information on importing data into a data table, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.

1.5.9 Importing Tables from Text FilesYou can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables.

To import a table:


2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears.

Figure 1.25: Exporting a data table

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.



3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears.

4. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1.26).

5. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box.

6. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list.

7. Select a Field Separator from the list.

8. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table.

9. Under Field Mapping, there are two header rows:

- Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing.- Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table.

Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Desti-nation row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1.26). Select <Ignore> forsource file columns that you do not want to import.

10. Click Import. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table.

You can import data from text files into the Sites, Links, Multi-Hops, and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folderor a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I.

For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.

1.5.10 Exporting Tables to XML FilesYou can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. You can use XML to exchange information betweenAtoll and the OMC.

Figure 1.26: Importing information into a data table

Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. If the Update Records check box is not selected, these records are not imported.

Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45.

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.


Atoll User Manual

Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table, and an index.xml file that contains the mapping between the tablesthat were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table. The index.xml file also stores the information onthe system (GSM, UMTS, etc.), the technologyTDMA, CDMA, , etc., and the version of Atoll with which the XML files werecreated. For more information about the formats of the XML files, see the Technical Reference Guide.

To export all the data tables in your document to XML files:

1. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears.

2. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create anew folder to store the XML files.

3. Click OK. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files.

For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document, see "Importing Tables from XML Files" onpage 52.

1.5.11 Importing Tables from XML FilesYou can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files. You can use XML to exchange information betweenAtoll and the OMC.

In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files, the XML files and the current Atoll documentmust use the same system (GSM, UMTS, etc.), the technologyTDMA, CDMA, , etc., and the Atoll version used to createthe XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. For more information about the formats of the XMLfiles, see the Technical Reference Guide.

To import data tables into your document from XML files:

1. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears.

2. Select the folder where the index.xml file is located.

3. Click OK. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index.xml file are imported in the document .

During the import procedure, existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. Once the import iscomplete, Atoll performs a database integrity check, and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not createdatabase problems.

For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files, see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" onpage 51.

1.6 Printing in AtollIn Atoll, you can print any part of your document, including maps, data tables, document reports, and antenna patterns.This section explains the following:

• "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52• "Printing a Map" on page 52• "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56

1.6.1 Printing Data Tables and ReportsData tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can, therefore, both be printed in the same way.

If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed, see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55.

To print a table:


2. If you want to print an area of the table, select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally tothe opposite corner.

3. Select File > Print.

4. If you want to print only a selected area, choose Selected in the Print dialogue.

5. Click OK to print.

1.6.2 Printing a MapYou can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies, predictions, etc. Atoll offers several options allowing youto customise and optimise the printed map. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0.

Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index.xml file. Do not modify the order of tables in the index.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important; some data must be imported before other data. For example, antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves.



Before you print a map, you have the following options:

• You can print the entire map, or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways:

- Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53).- Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31).

• You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54).• You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55).

To print a map:

1. Select the document window containing the map.

2. You now have the following options before printing the map:

- You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a FocusZone" on page 31).

- You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54).- You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55).

3. Select File > Print.

4. Click OK.

1.6.2.1 Printing RecommendationsThe appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. Objects inAtoll are arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on thescreen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of theselayers (for information on transparency, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23).

Before printing a map, it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows, when a document containssurface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps), lines (vectors such as roads, or airport), and points (measure-ments, etc.):

• Points (vectors)• Roads and Lines (vectors)• Surface polygons (vectors)• Multi-format maps - population, geoclimatic, traffic maps (vector or raster), and others• Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps)• Images, DTM, or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps).

Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. For this reason, visible objects on the Data tab, for example,sites, transmitters, and predictions, are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. For performance reasons, however, it isstrongly recommended to put vector layers, such as roads, over predictions. This will ensure that these vector layers arevisible when you print the map.

To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions:

1. In the Explorer window, click the Geo tab.

2. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. The context menu appears.

3. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu.

4. Click the Data tab.

5. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites, Antennas, and Transmitters.

1.6.2.2 Defining the Printing ZoneYou can define an area to be printed.

To create a printing zone:



3. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. The context menu appears.


5. Draw the printing zone:

a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone.

b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. When you release the mouse,the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners.

The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1.27). If you clear the printing zone’s visibility checkbox in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be takeninto account.

Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. Before printing for the first time, you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems.


Atoll User Manual

You can also create a printing zone as follows:

• Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in theVector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone.

• Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it andselecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu.

• Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, you can import it and use it as a printing zone.You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the contextmenu.

• Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Windowfrom the context menu.

Once you have created a printing zone, you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulersof the map window. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. For more information on thepolygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31.

1.6.2.3 Defining the Print LayoutYou can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. On the Print Setup dialogue,you can:

• Set the scale of the map.• Choose to print the rulers with the map.• Choose to print the area outside the focus zone.• Choose to print the legend.• Add a title, comment, logo, header, or footer.• Select paper size and source, as well as the page orientation and the margins.

These settings can be saved as a configuration, allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then importthe next time you print a similar document.

To define the appearance of the map when it is printed:

1. Select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialogue appears. You define the print set up on the Page tab, theComponents tab, and the Header/Footer tab. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview onthe right side of the Print Setup dialogue.

Figure 1.27: Printing zone

Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.

Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings, you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings.



2. Click the Page tab. On the Page tab, you can define the page size, margins, and orientation and the scale of theprinted map:

a. Under Orientation, select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape.

b. Under Paper, select the Size of the paper and, optionally, the Source of the paper.

c. Under Scaling, define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page, or by selecting Scale anddefining the scale.

d. Under Margins, set the margins of the page in millimetres.

3. Click the Components tab.

a. Under Map, you can define the appearance of the printed map:

- Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it.- Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the

focus zone.

b. Under Legend, you can define the placement of the legend.

- Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map.

- Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend.

c. Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. Clickingthe Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current timeand date. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it), select the On the map checkbox.

4. Click the Header/Footer tab. On the Header/Footer tab, you can set the position of graphic elements.

a. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. Clicking the Prop-erties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date.If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it), select the On the map check box.

b. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2, you can define graphics that appear for the map. The graphics can be a companylogo or other information, such as copyright information, in the form of a BMP graphic.

i. For the selected check box, click the Properties button. The Logo dialogue appears.

By default, Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. If a file namedlogo.bmp is present in this folder, it is considered as the default header logo. However, you can select adifferent file.

ii. Click File. The Open dialogue appears.

iii. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open.

iv. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels).

v. Click OK.

c. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position.Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the cur-rent time and date. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it), select the Onthe map check box.

5. Once you have made your settings, click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue, or click Print to print the document.

1.6.3 Previewing Your PrintingWhen you want to print maps, data tables, or reports, you can preview your printing.

- Click a button to set the Position of the legend. The buttonsinside the square will place the legend on top of the map.The buttons outside of the square will place the legendoutside of the map.

Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. If your logo is in a different format, you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format.

Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them.


Atoll User Manual

To preview your printing:

1. Select the map or table you want to print.

2. Select File > Print Preview. The Print Preview window appears.

At the top of the Print Preview window, you can click one of the following buttons:

- Click Print to open the Print dialogue.- Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview.- Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview.- Click Next Page to display the following page- Click Prev Page to display the previous page.- Click Two Page to display two pages side by side- Click One Page to display a single page.

1.6.4 Printing a Docking WindowYou can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu; selecting File > Print only prints the contentsof a document window, as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. The docking windows whose contents you can printare:

• Legend Window (for more information on this tool, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24)• Point Analysis Tool • CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool, see the Measurements and Model Calibration

Guide.• Drive Test Data Analysis Tool • Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool, see "Studying Reflection" on page 210)

To print the content of a docking window:

1. Open the docking window you want to print.

- If you want to print a Point Analysis window, click the tab of the study you want to print.

2. Right-click the window you wish to print.

3. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears.


1.7 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering DataIn Atoll you can organise data in several different ways, allowing you to select only certain data and then, for example,modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. Atoll allows you to group, sort, or filter data quickly byone criterion, or by several.

After you have defined how you will group, sort, or filter data, you can save this information as a folder configuration.

In this section the following will be explained:

• "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56• "Sorting Data" on page 60• "Filtering Data" on page 62• "Folder Configurations" on page 69• "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71

1.7.1 Grouping Data ObjectsYou can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window. The objects to be groupedcan be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). You can also define theproperties by which you can group objects. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the datatable because it puts all records with the selected property together.

Once you have grouped data objects, you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit propertieson all grouped objects. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "FolderConfigurations" on page 69.

This section explains:

• "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56• "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57• "Advanced Grouping" on page 58.

For examples of grouping data objects, see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59.

1.7.1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected PropertyYou can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu.



To group data objects by a selected property:


2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. The context menu appears.

3. From the Group By submenu, select the property by which you want to group the objects. The objects in the folderare grouped by that property.

To undo the grouping:


2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.

3. From the context menu, select from the Group By > None.

See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59.

1.7.1.2 Configuring the Group By SubmenuSome data objects, such as transmitters, have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group Bysubmenu. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the prop-erties that are relevant for grouping.

To configure the Group By submenu:


2. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. The context menu appears.

3. Select Properties from the context menu.

4. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.

5. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. TheConfiguration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.28).

6. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. You can display all the fields belonging to a tableby clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. You can select contiguous fields by clicking thefirst field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL andclicking each fields separately.

- To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu, select the field in the Available Fields list and click

to move it to the Grouping Fields list. - To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields, select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click

to remove it.

- To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objectswill be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list, from top to bottom.

7. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The Group By sub-menu will now contain only the fields you selected.

Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57, you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. For information on using the dialogue that appears, see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57.

Figure 1.28: The Configuration dialogue


Atoll User Manual

1.7.1.3 Grouping Microwave Links by SiteYou can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site.

To group microwave links by site:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.

3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link andsorts the links by site (see Figure 1.29).

To restore normal display of microwave links:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.


4. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored.

1.7.1.4 Advanced GroupingYou can group data objects by one or more properties, using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue.

To group data objects by one or more properties:





5. Click the Group By button. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1.30).

6. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field,pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clickingeach fields separately.

- To select a field to be used to group the objects, select the field in the Available Fields list and click

to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. - To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Group these fields

in this order list and click to remove it.

- To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objectswill be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list, from top to bottom.

Figure 1.29: Grouping microwave links by site

Figure 1.30: The Group dialogue



7. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects.

To undo the grouping:



3. From the context menu, select from the Group By > None.

1.7.1.5 Examples of GroupingIn this example, there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and, therefore, transmitters. While it is easy tosee on the map which transmitters are part of which site, in the Explorer window, you can only see a very long list of trans-mitters under the Transmitter folder.

By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1.31), you can group the transmitters by thesite they are located on.

The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.32.

Figure 1.31: Grouping transmitters by site

Figure 1.32: Transmitters grouped by site


Atoll User Manual

You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone. You normally create a computation or focus zone when youwant to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters, for example, when you are working on a certain area of the network.By grouping them by computation or focus zone, the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under theTransmitter folder.

By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1.31), you can groupthe transmitters in the focus zone together.

The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.32. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zoneand those outside the focus zone.

1.7.2 Sorting DataIn Atoll, you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. Youcan sort the data in ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order.

You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. When you sort data by several columns, Atoll sorts the recordsby the first column and then, within each group of identical values in the first column, Atoll then sorts the records by thesecond column, and so on.

Once you have sorted data objects, you can save the settings as a folder configuration. For information, see "FolderConfigurations" on page 69.

This section explains the following:

• "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60• "Advanced Sorting" on page 61

1.7.2.1 Sorting Data in TablesWhen sorting data in tables, you can sort by one column or by several columns.

Figure 1.33: Grouping transmitters by zone

Figure 1.34: Transmitters grouped by site



Sorting by One Column

To sort data in a table by one column:


2. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. The entire column is selected.

3. Right-click the column header. The context menu appears.

4. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort:

- Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highestvalue.

- Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowestvalue.

Sorting by Several Columns

You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent, you can move thecolumns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46.

To sort data in a table by several columns:


2. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references.The entire column is selected.

3. Right-click the column headers. The context menu appears.

4. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort:

- Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highestvalue.

- Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowestvalue.

1.7.2.2 Advanced SortingYou can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue.

To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue:

1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

2. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The context menu appears


4. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue.

5. Click the Sort button. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1.35).

6. For the first column you want to sort on:

a. Select the column name from the Sort by list.

b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order.

7. For each other column you want to sort on:

a. Select the column name from the And by list.

b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order.

8. Click OK.

Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns, you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. For information, see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61.


Atoll User Manual

1.7.3 Filtering DataIn Atoll, you can filter data according to one or several criteria. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data,or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.

The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria.

You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder Configurations" on page 69.


• "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62• "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63• "Restoring All Records" on page 64• "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.

1.7.3.1 Filtering in Data Tables by SelectionYou can filter a data table by selecting one or more values. Once you have selected one or more values, you can chooseto view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value.

To filter a data table on one or more fields:


2. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value, press CTRL as you click the other values.

3. Select one of the following from the Records menu:

- Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify theserecords or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.36 onpage 62).

- Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. You can nowmodify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (seeFigure 1.37 on page 63).

Figure 1.35: The Sort dialogue

Figure 1.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209)



1.7.3.2 Advanced Data FilteringYou can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters.

To create an advanced filter:


2. Select Records > Advanced Filter. The Filter dialogue appears.

3. Click the Filter tab:

a. Select a Field from the list.

b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxesnext to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.

4. Click the Advanced tab:

a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns asyou want (see Figure 1.38).

b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the fol-lowing table:

Figure 1.37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209)

Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue.

Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62.

Figure 1.38: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab

Formula Data are kept in the table only if

=X value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)

<> X value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)

< X numerical value is less than X


Atoll User Manual

5. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.

Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically.

See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.

1.7.3.3 Restoring All RecordsAfter you have applied filter criteria to records, you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.

To restore all records:

• Select Records > Remove Filter.

1.7.3.4 Advanced Filtering: ExamplesIn this section, you will find a few examples of advanced filtering:

• "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64• "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65• "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65.

1.7.3.4.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1In this example, there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics.

The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between50 and 100°. To do this, the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information onthe Advanced tab, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63):

• The first criterion, as shown in Figure 1.40, is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a"K" ("=K*"). While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"), it is not necessary because there is only onemanufacturer with a "K."

• The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. • The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.

The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidthunder 100° but over 50°.

The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.40.

>X numerical value is greater than X

<=X numerical value is less than or equal to X

>=X numerical value is greater than or equal to X

*X* text objects which contain X

X* text objects which start with X

Formula Data are kept in the table only if

Figure 1.39: Initial table



1.7.3.4.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. The objective of this exampleis the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "AdvancedData Filtering" on page 63), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors:

• As shown in Figure 1.41, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a"K" ("=K*").

• The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.


As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein witha beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However, because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) ismalformed, with "> 50" placed under "< 100", it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. The resultingfilter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°, or all antennas over 50°; all anten-nas are displayed.

1.7.3.4.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. The objective of this exampleis the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "AdvancedData Filtering" on page 63), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors:

• As shown in Figure 1.42, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a"K" ("=K*").

• The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.


Figure 1.40: Advanced filtering

Figure 1.41: Errors in filtering


Atoll User Manual

As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein witha beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However, because the second criterion is malformed, the filter only generates an errormessage and no antennas are filtered out.

1.7.4 User ConfigurationsIn Atoll, you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings inanother document. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database, the information stored in auser configuration, such as geographic data, is not stored in the database. You can create a user configuration file,however, to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings.

The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones arebeing exported in the user configuration file, Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO." Because the file is in XML (eXtensibleMarkup Language), you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor.

When you create a user configuration file, you can export the following information:

• Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps, map display settings (such as, the visi-bility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.), clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss,orthogonality factor, the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoorloss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as theraster maps.

• Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document.• Folder configurations: Sorting, grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings,

even if not saved), the filtering zone, and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement displaysettings).

• Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links.• Macros: The complete path of any macros. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session, and not to a specific

Atoll document, you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll documentopen.

For a detailed description of the user configuration file, see the Administrator Manual.


• "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67• "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67.

Figure 1.42: Errors in filtering

Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file, the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data.



1.7.4.1 Exporting a User ConfigurationYou create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file.

To export a user configuration:

1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.43).

2. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration.

3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears.

4. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.

1.7.4.2 Importing a User ConfigurationYou can import a user configuration that you or another user has created, as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration"on page 67, it into your current Atoll document.

To import a user configuration:

1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The Open dialogue appears.

2. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import.

3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.44).

4. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import.

5. Click OK. The user configuration is imported.

1.7.5 Site ListsIn Atoll, you can create lists of sites. Once you have created a site list, you can modify the list and use it to filter data tobe able to work with a subset of data, or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of recordsdisplayed.

Figure 1.43: Exporting a user configuration

Figure 1.44: Importing a user configuration


Atoll User Manual

In a multi-user environment, site lists can be stored in the database. When you open a document from a database, youcan select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. In a large radio-planning project, this allows you to moreeffectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database.


• "Creating a Site List" on page 68• "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68• "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68• "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68• "Editing a Site List" on page 69• "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69.

1.7.5.1 Creating a Site ListYou can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed.

To create a site list:


2. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list:

Site list: if you want to create a site list:

a. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.

b. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Lists table appears.

3. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

1.7.5.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer WindowYou can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window.

To add a site to a list:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder.

3. Right-click the site you want to add to the list. The context menu appears.

Site list: if you want to add a site to a list:

- Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.

4. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.

5. Click OK. The site is added to the selected list.

1.7.5.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map WindowYou can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window.

To add a site to a list:

1. In the map window, right-click the site you want to add to a list.

Site list: if you want to add a site to a list:

- Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.


3. Click OK. The site is added to the selected list.

1.7.5.4 Adding Sites to a List Using a ZoneYou can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list.

Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. The selected site will be added to the new list.

Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62. Then, by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu, you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select.




To add the sites contained in a zone to a list:

1. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want toadd to a list. You can use a filtering, computation, focus, printing, or geographic export zone.

2. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window, right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu:

- Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. A dialogue appears.


4. Click OK. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list.

1.7.5.5 Editing a Site ListYou can edit a site list using the Site List table.

To edit a site list:


2. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list:

Site list: if you want to edit a site list:

a. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.

b. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Lists table appears.

3. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.

4. You can now edit the list:

To add a site to the list:

- Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

To delete a site from the list:

a. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it.

b. Press DEL to delete the site from the list.

5. Click OK when you have finished editing the site list.

1.7.5.6 Filtering on a Site ListYou can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder.

To filter folder contents using a site list:


2. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. The context menu appears.


4. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue, click the Filter button. The Filter dialogue appears.

5. If you have created a list, there will be an additional tab:

- Sites: Click the Site Lists tab.

6. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display.

7. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue.

8. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Datatab of the Explorer window and in the map window.

1.7.6 Folder ConfigurationsIn Atoll, the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, sorted, or filtered are referred to as a folderconfiguration. You can define folder configurations and save them, allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping,filtering, or sorting criteria.


• "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70• "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70• "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70• "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70• "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70• "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71.



Atoll User Manual

1.7.6.1 Creating a Folder ConfigurationIn Atoll, you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, filtered, or sorted as a folderconfiguration.

To create a configuration:


2. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save.



5. If you have not yet done so, set the following parameters as desired:

- Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56)- Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60)- Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62).

6. Under Configuration, click Save.

7. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue.

8. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.

The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it fromthe Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu.

1.7.6.2 Applying a Saved Folder ConfigurationYou can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder.

To apply a saved folder configuration:


2. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. The context menu appears.

3. On the Configurations submenu, select the name of the configuration you want to apply. The folder configurationis applied to the current folder.

1.7.6.3 Reapplying the Current Folder ConfigurationIf you have grouped, filtered, or sorted a data folder, you have created and applied a folder configuration. If you then addor modify data, the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. Inthis case, you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data.

To reapply the folder configuration:


2. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply.

3. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. The previously configured folder configuration isreapplied to the data.

1.7.6.4 Exporting a Folder ConfigurationWhen you create a folder configuration, you save it to the current ATL document. However, you can export it as part of auser configuration to an external file, so that it can be used in other documents.

To export a folder configuration:

1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.43 onpage 67).

2. Select the Folder Configuration check box.

If you want to export other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well.

3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears.

4. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.

1.7.6.5 Importing a Folder ConfigurationOnce you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70, you canimport it into your current document.

To import a folder configuration:


2. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import.

3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.44 on page 67).

4. Select the Folder Configuration check box.



If you want to import other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well.

5. Click OK. The folder configuration is imported.

1.7.6.6 Deleting a Folder ConfigurationYou can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it.

To delete a folder configuration:


2. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete.



5. Under Configuration, select the name of the configuration from the list.

6. Click Delete. The folder configuration is deleted.

1.7.7 Creating and Comparing SubfoldersYou can compare the effects of different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders inthe Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the objectfolder in which it was created.

To create a subfolder of a folder:

1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of.

2. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original foldercontent.

You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder:

• Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56)• Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60)• Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62).

Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder, you can compare the differences, by displaying in turn eachsubfolder, with its grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, on the map. For more information on display properties, see"Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

To compare subfolders:

1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. The data objects arenot displayed on the map.

2. Select the check box of one of the subfolders, leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. The dataobjects of the selected subfolder, with its associated grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, are displayed on themap.

3. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. How the objects are displayed on the mapwill change, depending on the different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings of the selected subfolder.

You can remove subfolders by deleting them. When you delete a subfolder, the data contained are not deleted. When youdelete the last subfolder, the data reappear under the initial folder.

To delete a subfolder:

• Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu.

1.7.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering ZoneIn Atoll, you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calcu-lations. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data

Caution: When you delete a folder configuration, Atoll will not ask for confirmation; it is deleted immediately.

Tip: If you have created several subfolders, you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. For information on renaming an object, see "Renaming an Object" on page 17.

Tip: If, after deleting the last subfolder, the data do not reappear under the initial folder, you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

objects on the map clearer. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw anew filtering zone.

The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. On the Data tab of the Explorer

window, any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ), to indicate that thefolder contents have been filtered.

When you have applied a polygon filter, you can perform the following actions on the filtered data:

• Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56)• Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60)• Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62).

For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone, see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29.

1.8 Tips and TricksIn this section, you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll:

• "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72• "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72• "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72• "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73• "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74• "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74• "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75.

1.8.1 Undoing and RedoingYou can undo or redo most actions in Atoll, up to a maximum of 10 actions. If you perform an action that can not beundone, for example, a simulation, the Undo and Redo histories are erased.

For example, you can undo or redo:

• Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating, deleting, and moving a site, a station or a group of sta-tions, modifying the antenna azimuth, moving a transmitter, or deleting a transmitter,

• Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites, transmitters, antennas, repeatersor remote antennas, links, groups of hexagons, measurement paths, coverage predictions, maps, propagationmodels, etc.).

• Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records, pasting in tables.

To undo an action:

• Select Edit > Undo.

To redo an action that you have undone:

• Select Edit > Redo.

1.8.2 Refreshing Maps and FoldersUnder certain circumstances, for example, when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter, the data displayedon the map or in the Explorer window, may not be actual. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data andreapply the current configurations to folders.

To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map:

• Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5.

1.8.3 Searching for Objects on the MapAtoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. You can search for some objects (sites, transmitters,repeaters, or links) by their name, using the Find toolbar. By using the Location Finder, you can search for a site, a micro-wave link, or a vector by any text field. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x andy coordinates.

This section explains:

• "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72• "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73• "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73.

1.8.3.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its NameYou can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name:

• sites• microwave links.



To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar:

1. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar.

2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for:

- Site- Link

3. Enter the name of the object in the Named box. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways:

- *X* names which contain X- X* names which start with X- *X names which end with X

4. Press ENTER. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window.

1.8.3.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text PropertyYou can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i.e., non-numeric) property:

• sites• microwave links• vectors.

To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder:

1. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.

2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for:

- Site- Link- Vector

3. If you wish to search all the sites in the search, including sites that are presently filtered out, select the Include allthe sites in the search (filtered or not) check box.

4. Under Criteria, select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. You can use an asterisk as a wildcard in the following ways:

- *X* text objects which contain X- X* text objects which start with X

5. Click OK. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window.

1.8.3.3 Searching for a Point on the MapYou can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder.

To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder:

1. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.

2. From the Find list, choose Point.

3. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point, using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tabof the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81).

4. Click OK. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window.

1.8.4 Using the Status Bar to Get InformationAtoll displays the following information, if available, about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of thestatus bar (see Figure 1.45):

• the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system)• the altitude (as defined in the DTM)• the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties)• the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file, or in the clutter classes).

Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it.

Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder. For information, see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73.

Note: To remove the point icon ( ), select it and then select Delete from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

1.8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event ViewerAtoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. The Event Viewer displays information ( ),

warning ( ), and error ( ) messages, as well as the progress of calculations. You can save the information displayedin the Event Viewer in a log file.

To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file:

1. If the Event Viewer is not displayed, select View > Event Viewer to display it.

2. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. Click and drag to select several events.

3. Right-click the select event(s). The context menu appears.

4. Select Save As. The Save As dialogue appears.

5. In the Save As dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save astype list.

6. Click OK. The selected events are saved in the text file.

You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in theEvent viewer. For more information about these settings, see the Administrator Manual.

1.8.6 Using Icons from the ToolbarYou can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys(see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75).

The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below:

• In the Standard toolbar

Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N)

Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O)

Save the current document (CTRL+S)

Cut the selected data (CTRL+X)

Copy the selected data (CTRL+C)

Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V)

Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z)

Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y)

Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P)

Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P)

Open the About Atoll dialogue

• In the Map toolbar

Select area

Refresh display of map and folders (F5)

Disable zooming and panning tools.

Move the map window (CTRL+D)

Figure 1.45: Information displayed in the status bar

X-Y coordinates Clutter classAltitude (from DTM)



Map scale currently used

Previous/Next view (zoom and location)

Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on thecursor location (CTRL+R)

Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W)

Turn on tool tips

Measure distances on the map

Location finder

Display a point-to-point profile

• In the Microwave link toolbar

Create a new microwave link.

Create a new multi-hop microwave link.

Create a new multipoint microwave link.

Currently selected microwave link model

Activate the microwave link profile analysis window

Show or hide victim and interferer links

Show or hide site parities

Stop the calculations in progress

• In the Search toolbar

Centre site in the map window.

• In the Vector Edition toolbar

Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab)

Select the vector layer to edit

Draw a new polygon

Draw a new rectangle

Draw a new line

Draw points

Merge several vector polygons

Cut out areas in polygons

Create new polygon from overlapping areas

Split one polygon along the drawn lines.

1.8.7 Using Shortcuts in AtollAtoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly.

The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon; see "UsingIcons from the Toolbar" on page 74):

Note: When you place the cursor over an icon, a tool tip appears, giving a short description.


Atoll User Manual

• Using the CTRL key:

- CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar, click and click the map)

- CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar, click and right-click the map)

- CTRL+A: Select all records in a table

- CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+D:

- In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells

- In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites, Links, Multi-Hops, or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolderto a text file. For more information, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.

- CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table

- CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites, Links, Multi-Hops, or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolderfrom a text file. For more information, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.

- CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database

- CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells

- CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar, click )

- CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar, click )

• Using the ALT key:

- ALT+←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar, click )

- ALT+→: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar, click )

- ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue

• Using the Function Keys

- F3: Select the Find Site tool.

- F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select )

Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name.


Chapter 2

Starting an Atoll Project


Atoll User Manual

Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project

2 Starting an Atoll ProjectWhen you want to start a new project, you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for thetechnology you are using. Once you have started your new Atoll project, you can modify the network parameters to meetyour particular needs. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS, CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO, micro-wave radio links, UMTS HSPA, WiMAX, and LTE. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included withyour Atoll installation. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template, making the changesnecessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template.

When you open an existing project, you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have workedon, or you can open it from the Open dialogue. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files, it may happenthat one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. Atoll enables you to findthe file and repair the link.

In this chapter, the following are explained:

• "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79• "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79.

2.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning ProjectFor every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary:

• Microwave equipment: sites, antennas, and other equipment. For more information on equipment, see the tech-nology-specific chapters.

• Microwave data: frequency bands, technology-specific parameters, coordinate systems, etc. For more informa-tion onmicrowave data, see the technology-specific chapters.

• Geographic data: clutter classes, clutter heights, DTM, population maps, etc. For more information on geographicdata, see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

Once the necessary data have been assembled, you can create the Atoll document.

2.2 Creating an Atoll DocumentWhatever the radio technology you will be modelling, you create an Atoll document in one of two ways:

• From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. Atoll is delivered with atemplate for each technology you will be planning for. For information on creating a document from a template,see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79.

You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customisedwith, for example, certain geo data or antennas.

• From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database, the database you connectto has been created with the technology and data you need. Working with a database allows several users to sharethe same data while at the same time managing data consistency. The exact procedure for creating a new Atolldocument from a database differs, depending on the database containing the data. Atoll can work with severalcommon databases. For information on starting a document from a database, see "Creating a New Atoll Documentfrom a Database" on page 84.

2.2.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a TemplateYou can create a new Atoll document from a template. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for.Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. For example, the tabs in the transmitterProperties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. As well, the objects that areavailable are appropriate for the technology. For example, UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRXare only available in GSM-TDMA documents.

Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project, you configure the basic parametersof the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81).


• "Templates Available" on page 79• "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80• "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81

2.2.1.1 Templates AvailableDepending on your configuration of Atoll, the following templates are available:

• Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links, as part of a complete mobile telecom-munications network, from any technology template. However, this template is provided to enable you to create aproject of only microwave radio links.

• TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA


Atoll User Manual

2.2.1.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a TemplateTo create a new document from a template:

1. Select File > New > From a Document Template. The Project Templates dialogue appears.

2. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. Atoll creates a new document basedon the template selected.

Figure 2.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. The Data tab of the Explorerwindow now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project, with, among otherUMTSUMTS-specific elements, folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. TheAntennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. These can be modifiedor replaced. Figure 2.47 and Figure 2.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document, respec-tively.

When you create an Atoll document from a template, the document is not connected to a database.

To verify whether the document is connected to a database:

• Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The dialogue in Figure 2.49 appears.

Figure 2.46: New Atoll document based on a template

Figure 2.47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.48: New Atoll document — Modules tab



2.2.1.3 Defining a New Atoll DocumentOnce you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" onpage 80, you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document. You can accept the default values for some param-eters, such as basic measurement units, but you must set projection and display coordinate systems.


• "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81• "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82• "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82

2.2.1.3.1 Projection and Display Coordinate SystemsIn Atoll, you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the displaycoordinate system. By default, the same coordinate system is used for both.

A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. This projection cannot be done withoutdistortion, thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area or shape) which is to be

shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics, or he must compromise on several characteristics1. Theprojected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter, yard, etc.).

Two projection systems are widely used:

• The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone concep-tually secant at one or two standard parallels. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regionsthat lay primarily east to west.

• The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on acylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This projection type is useful formapping large areas that are oriented north-south.

A geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordi-nates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTFsystem and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections.

Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a database based on the Euro-pean Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. Atoll distinguishes thecartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display.

The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic datafiles; thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By choosing a specific display system, you cansee (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projectioncoordinate system. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automat-ically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.

In Figure 2.50, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the French Riviera projectedusing the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). On the other hand, site coordinatesare stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds).

Figure 2.49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database

1. Snyder, John. P., Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey, 2nd Edition, United States GovernmentPrinting Office, Washington, D.C., 313 pages, 1982.


Atoll User Manual

2.2.1.3.2 Setting a Coordinate SystemBecause you are working with maps, you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document. By default, projection anddisplay coordinate systems are the same, but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish.

To define the coordinate system:

1. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears.

2. On the Coordinates tab, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Projection field. The Coordinate Sys-tems dialogue appears.

3. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue, select a catalogue from the Find in list. For the projection system, only car-

tographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.

4. Select a coordinate system from the list.

5. Click OK. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and, by default, in the Display field aswell.

6. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the

Display field and repeat step 3. to step 5. For the display system, both cartographic systems (identified by the

symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.

2.2.1.3.3 Selecting the Degree Display FormatAtoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. For example:

• 26°56’29.9’’N• 26d56m29.9sN• 26.93914N• +26.93914

To change the degree display format:


2. On the Coordinates tab, select the format from the Degree Format list.

3. Click OK.

2.2.1.3.4 Setting Measurement UnitsWhen you create a new Atoll document, Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception, transmission, distance,height, and offset to internal defaults. You can accept these default measurement units, or you can change them using theOptions dialogue.

Figure 2.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system

Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. If not, you must convert them to a single cartographic system.

Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites.

Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems.



To set the measurement units:


2. On the Units tab, select the desired unit for the following measurements:

- Reception- Transmission- Distance- Height and offset

3. Click OK.

2.2.2 Working in a Multi-User EnvironmentA multi-user environment is one where a number of users, or groups of users, work simultaneously on given parts of asingle, large (may be nation-wide) network. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of thenetwork. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose.

When you create a new Atoll document from a database, Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database intoyour new document and then disconnects it from the database. The connection to the reference database is reactivatedonly when necessary, thus ensuring access to the database by other users.

When you work on a document created from a database, you are working on data that you are sharing with other users.Consequently, there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document.For example, when you archive your changes to the database, the changes you have made may occasionally interferewith changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict.


• "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83• "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84• "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85• "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86• "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87.

2.2.2.1 The Atoll Multi-User EnvironmentAn Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements, connected over a network:

• A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed, modified, and updated by the Atolladministrator. Through this central Atoll project, the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all theindividual Atoll users or groups of users.

• Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are thenaccessed, modified, worked on, and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. The shared data are mainlyof the following three types:

- The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. It isinitiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator, and is then subdivided into sections on whichusers or groups of users can work simultaneously. Once the database is in place, users can modify theirprojects, refresh their projects from the data stored in the database, and archive their modifications in the data-base. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users, modi-fied or deleted records, for example, can be detected and resolved.

- Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fastaccess connection. Since geographic data files are usually large, they are usually linked to an Atoll file, i.e.,they are stored externally, so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. Users who modify geographic datalocally, for example, editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects, usually store these modificationslocally, since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users.

• User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon andmanaged by each user. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database, load only therequired part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file, for example), and have access to the shared pathloss matrices folder.


Atoll User Manual

2.2.2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a DatabaseWhen you create a new document from a database, you must connect to the database. Once connected, Atoll loads thedatabase into a new Atoll document. Then the connected is interrupted. A new connection with the database will becreated only when necessary, in order to allow other users access to the database.

The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. Atoll can work with the follow-ing databases:

• Microsoft Access• Microsoft SQL Server• Oracle• Sybase• Microsoft Data Link files

The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data:

• "Connecting to a Database" on page 84.• "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85.

An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in:

• "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85

2.2.2.2.1 Connecting to a DatabaseTo create a new document from a database:

1. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears.

2. In the Files of type list, select the option corresponding to the type of your database. Depending on the type ofthe database, a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name, Password, and Server.

3. Click OK. The Data to Load dialogue appears, allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document(see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85).

Figure 2.51: Components of Multi-user Environments

Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database, see the Administrator Manual.

Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load.



2.2.2.2.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the DatabaseWhen you create a new document from a database, you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create thedocument in the Data to load dialogue. You can select which Project, Site List, Custom Fields Groups, and Neighbourto load. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list, Atoll will also load the associated excep-tional pairs table.

2.2.2.3 Working With a Document on a DatabaseFigure 2.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database. The Data tab of the Explorer window now hasa folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a documentcreated from a database can have additional data, such as sites, unlike a document created from a template. These canbe modified or replaced. Figure 2.54 and Figure 2.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new docu-ment, respectively.

Figure 2.52: Selecting the data to load

Figure 2.53: New Atoll document opened from a database

Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder, right-clicking on any site, and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

When you create an Atoll document from a database, you can view the characteristics of the database connection.

To view the characteristics of the database connection:

1. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The Database Connection dialogue appears (seeFigure 2.56).

2. You can now:

- Disconnect your document from the database.

- Modify your connection to the database.

2.2.2.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the DatabaseAs you are working on your document, other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data.You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database.How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. If the database is updatedfrequently, you should refresh your document frequently as well, in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data.

To refresh an Atoll document from the database:

1. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database. The Refresh dialogue appears.

2. In the dialogue, you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved thosechanges in the database:

- Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server insteadof refreshing your document from the server.

- Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that youhave not modified in your document.

- Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have madeand start over from the point of the last archive to the database.

Figure 2.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab

Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database, it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.

Figure 2.56: The Database Connection dialogue

Notes:

• If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database,Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation.

• If you chose Archive your changes in the database, the Archive dialogue appears. For infor-mation on using the Archive dialogue, see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Documentin the Database" on page 87.



3. Under Take into account, you can select the neighbour lists, Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-tech-nology Neighbours, to refresh.

4. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh, you can generate a report for the refresh process.

5. Click OK. The document is refreshed according to the selected options.

If you selected to generate a report, Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporaryfiles system folder, and opens it. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. The report lists all the modifi-cations (deletions, additions, and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or openedyour document.

2.2.2.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the DatabaseWhen you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database, you should from time to time archive the modi-fications you have made to the data on the database. How frequently you should archive your document depends onseveral factors: the amount and size of changes you make, the number of other users using the database who may benefitfrom your modifications, etc. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given toyou. For example, you can have read access to the antennas table, allowing you to create a new Atoll document with thegiven antennas. However, because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas, you will not be ableto archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table.

The Atoll archiving process is flexible. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. As well,when you are archiving, Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and, if you wish, you can archive only someof them or even undo modifications you have made locally. Occasionally, other users might have modified some of thesame data and, when you archive your changes, Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them.


• "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87• "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87• "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88.

2.2.2.5.1 Archiving All Modifications in the DatabaseTo archive all your modifications in the database:

1. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2.57).

2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following:

- Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database.- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item

and the item on the database.- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from

the database.

3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, Atoll stops the archiving processand asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" onpage 88.

4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.

2.2.2.5.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the DatabaseAtoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology youare working with. For example, in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project, the site-related data are: sites, transmitters, cells,and neighbours.

Figure 2.57: The Archive dialogue


Atoll User Manual

To archive only the site-related data in the database:

1. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. The Archive dialogue appears.

2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following:

- Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database.- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item

and the item on the database.- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from

the database.

3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, Atoll stops the archiving processand asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" onpage 88.

4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.

2.2.2.5.3 Resolving Data ConflictsAtoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database forother users. However, this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. When the second userattempts to archive his changes, Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data andthat there is a conflict.

Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. When Atoll finds a conflict, it displays the warning shown in Figure 2.58.

You have three options:

• Ignore: If you click Ignore, Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived, archives all othermodifications in the table, and continues with the next table. You can resolve the conflicts after the archivingprocess has ended. However, if conflicts are found in other tables, Atoll will warn you with the Database TransferError dialogue again.

• Ignore All: If you click Ignore All, Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived, andarchives all other modifications. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended.

• Abort: If you click Abort, the archiving process stops. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting thearchiving process.

Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately, or wait until the end of the archive process, theprocedure to resolve the conflict is the same.

To resolve data conflicts one by one:

1. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue, select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve.There are two different types of data conflicts:

- On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and anotheruser has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. A conflict is caused only bydifferences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document.

The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears, with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2.59). In theConflict in Changes dialogue, you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values col-umn, as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column.

Figure 2.58: Conflict warning



- If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document, select thecheck box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Your modification will be written to the data-base, overwriting the value there.

- If you want to accept the value of the field in the database, clear the check box next to the highlightedchange and click Archive. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain un-changed.

- On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and anotheruser has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. For information, see "Resolving DataConflicts" on page 88.

Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the data-base (see Figure 2.60). Select one of the following:

- Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database, thereby recreating the deleted record.- No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document.- Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.

2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.

To resolve all the data conflicts:

1. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue, select any conflict and click Resolve All. Atoll displaysa message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2.61). Select one of the following:

- Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your docu-ment with values from the database.

- No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from yourdocument.

- Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.

2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.

Figure 2.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue

Figure 2.60: Conflict on a deleted record

Figure 2.61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously

Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications.


Atoll User Manual

2.3 Making a Backup of Your DocumentAtoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. Once you have saved the document,Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. For example, for a document named"filename.atl," Atoll will create a backup file called "filename.atl.bak" in the same folder as the original document. You candefine the update interval each time you start Atoll.

You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an optionin the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.

When you have activated automatic backup, Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. Conse-quently, if you have a lot of documents open, this operation can take a long time. However, you can optimise the processby opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions, instead of in the same Atoll session. This also improves memorymanagement because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems; 4 GB under 64-bit oper-ating systems) memory allocation. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session, these documents will usethe same 2 GB memory pool. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions, each document will have its own 2 GB allo-cated memory.


• "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90• "Recovering a Backup" on page 91.

2.3.1 Configuring Automatic BackupYou can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session.

To configure automatic backup:

1. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (seeFigure 2.62).

2. Select the Activate automatic backup check box.

3. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving theback up of your file every time (see Figure 2.63).

4. Enter a time interval, in minutes, between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every textbox.

5. Click OK.

If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box, Atoll prompts you each time before backingup the document. If you click OK, Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents. If you click Cancel, Atoll skips thebackup once.

The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed. Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer everytime a backup file is updated. If you are performing calculations, i.e., coverage predictions or simulations, the automaticbackup is delayed until the calculations have ended. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. If you save theoriginal document manually, the timer is reset to 0.

Figure 2.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue

Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. Therefore, you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process.

Figure 2.63: Automatic backup prompt



2.3.2 Recovering a BackupYou can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document.

To recover your backup document:

1. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup.

2. If the original document was named "filename.atl," the backup document will be in the same folder and will becalled "filename.atl.bak". Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. For example, you could changethe name to "filename-backup.atl."

3. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backupwas saved.

2.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll ProjectsYou can create portable Atoll documents in two ways:

• by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file, or • by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll doc-

ument.

In most working environments, geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL docu-ments of different users over a network. Often these geographic data files are quite large, and it is not feasible to embedthese files in an ATL file due to file size, memory consumption, and performance reasons. It is, therefore, more useful tomake a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files.

Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu.

To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files:

1. Select File > Save to Zip. The Save As dialogue appears.

2. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored, enter a File name for the archive to be created, andselect "Zip Files (*.zip)" from the Save as type list.

Atoll creates a ZIP file containing:

- A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file).

The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices, geo-graphic data, coverage predictions, simulation results, measurement data, etc.).

- A ".losses" folder containing a pathloss.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss.dbf filecorresponding to the extended path loss matrices.

Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for makinga portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATLfile. The pathloss.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive inAtoll.

- A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for theAtoll document.

This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. Geographic data that arefound outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder, and data present within folderson the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. If the geographic data files linked to the documentare located on a remote computer, such as a file server over a network, they are first copied to the local com-puter in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive.

Once the portable archive is created, you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool.

To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files:

1. Select File > Open from Zip. The Open dialogue appears.

2. Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files.

3. Click Open. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears.

4. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file.

5. Click OK. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. If necessary, it creates the subfoldersrequired for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive, itopens the extracted ATL file. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file.

Important: If you just remove the BAK extension, your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. Therefore, it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent.


Atoll User Manual

Notes:

• You do not need to have a compression utility, such as WinZip or WinRAR, installed on thecomputer for this feature.

• The highest compression level is used when creating the archive.


Chapter 3

Managing Geographic Data


Atoll User Manual

Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data

3 Managing Geographic DataSeveral different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM),clutter classes, clutter heights, scanned images, and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can importor create. Some data types, such as clutter classes, can be used to give more realistic calculations. Other types such asscanned images, are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study.

You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. When you import a geo data file into Atoll,you can decide in which folder it goes. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used datatypes. Therefore, choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. You can also create your own data type byimporting a file and defining what data is to be used.

Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document, you can edit the data, define how the geo data will be displayed.Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type, deciding the priority of data files with different infor-mation or different resolutions. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab, either by transferring them tothe Data tab, or by importing them directly to the Data tab.

You can also create and edit geographic data. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can addcontours, lines, or points, create new geographic data, or modify existing data. You can also create raster-basedgeographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes.

You can export most geo data objects (for example, DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, raster polygons, or vector layers)for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo dataobjects back to the original files. This enables you to update the original files and, through the process of saving them,recompact the file.

This chapter explains the following topics:

• "Geographic Data Types" on page 95• "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96• "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96• "Clutter Classes" on page 103• "Clutter Heights" on page 106• "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103• "Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 106• "Scanned Images" on page 107• "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108• "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109• "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113• "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116.

3.1 Geographic Data TypesAn Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats forgeographic data files. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document:

• Geographic data used in propagation calculation:

- Digital terrain model- Clutter classes- Clutter heights

• Geographic data used for display purposes:

- Scanned maps- Images from web map services (WMS)- Contours, lines, and points representing, for example, roads, railways, or regions.

In this section, the following data types are described:

• "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95• "Clutter Classes" on page 95• "Clutter Heights" on page 96• "Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 96• "Scanned Images" on page 96• "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96

Digital Terrain Model

The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value,discrete values, or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21).

The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations.

Clutter Classes

The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagationmodel during computations.


Atoll User Manual

Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutterclass, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutterclass, however, the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. For information on defining the heightper clutter class, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separateclutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96). A clutter height map can represent height much more accuratelybecause it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map.

Clutter Heights

Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. Clutter height mapscan offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because, in a clutter height file, it is possibleto have different heights within a single clutter class.

When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map, clutter altitude is taken from the clutterheight map.

You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value, discrete values, or by value intervals (see "DisplayProperties of Objects" on page 21).

Contours, Lines, and Points

Atoll supports contours, lines, and points to represent polygons such as regions, or lines such as roads or coastlines, orpoints. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. Contours can also be used to create filteringpolygons or computation or focus zones.

Scanned Images

Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps orsatellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are usedonly for display; they have no effect on calculations.

Geoclimatic Maps

Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density, vapour density,temperature, and refractivity. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.

Traffic Data Maps

Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. Traffic data maps are used fornetwork capacity analyses.

3.2 Supported Geographic Data FormatsAtoll supports the following geographic data formats:

• DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or 16-bit),Planet, BMP (8-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit)

• Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or16-bit), Planet, BMP (8-bit),, GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit)

• Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit), JPEG 2000 (8-bit), BIL (8-bit), IST (8-bit), BMP(8-bit), Planet, GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8-bit)

• Vector data files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB.• Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB.• Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit), JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit), BIL (1 to 24-bit), IST (1 to

24-bit), BMP (1 to 24-bit), Planet, Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit), GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit), and ECW (8 or24-bit)

• JPEG 2000 (16-bit), Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB.• Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit), JPEG 2000 (16-bit), BIL (16-bit), IST (16-bit), Planet, BMP (16-bit),

Erdas Imagine (16-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB.

3.3 Importing Geo Data FilesYou can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. As explained in "Supported GeographicData Formats" on page 96, Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. When you import a new geo datafile, Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. You can

Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model.

Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system.



embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding GeographicData" on page 102).

You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files.For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using userconfiguration files, see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112.


• "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97• "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98• "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99• "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101• "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102• "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102.

3.3.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data FileAll raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself.

To import a geographic data file in a raster format:

1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears.

2. Select the geo data file you want to import.

You can import more than one geo data file at the same time, providing that the geo data files are of the sametype. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want toimport. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file.

3. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.64).

Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options:

- DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list.- Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list.- Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list.- Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.

4. By default, the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. To embed the data file in the Atoll document, selectthe Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" onpage 102.

5. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

When you import a traffic data map, the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears:

a. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentagesmust equal 100.

b. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentages mustequal 100.

c. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentages mustequal 100.

d. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users.

An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have todefine a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density perpixel.

e. For UMTS and CDMA, select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, oronly in the Uplink.

f. Click OK.

Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue.

Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98.


Atoll User Manual

3.3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data FileWhen you import geo data files in vector format, their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atolldocument.

To import a vector-format geographic data file:


2. Select the geo data file you want to import.

You can import more than one geo data file at the same time, providing that the geo data files are of the sametype. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want toimport. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file.

3. Click Open. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.67).

Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options:

- Vector Data:

- Select Geo from the Import to list.

- Population:

i. Select Population from the Import to list.

ii. Under Fields to be imported, the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that youare importing, and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population densityor to a number of inhabitants.

iii. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field isa Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons, or number of inhabitants per kilome-tre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3.65 and Figure 3.66).

Figure 3.64: Importing a clutter class file

Note: If the File Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97.

Figure 3.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²)

Figure 3.66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point)



- Geoclimatic File:

i. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list.

ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value fromthe second list.

4. By default, the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. To embed the data file in the Atoll document, selectthe Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" onpage 102.

5. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

3.3.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo DataMSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. The index file is in ASCII text format andcontains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file. When you import MSI Planet® geodata, you can import each type of geo data separately, by importing the corresponding index file, or you can import severalMSI Planet® geo data files at the same time, by importing several index files.


• "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99• "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100.

3.3.3.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data TypeWhen you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data, such as a DTM or clutter heights, you import the indexfile containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data.

To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data:


2. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.68).

Figure 3.67: Vector Import dialogue

Notes:

• You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). Rectangles are interpretedas polygons.

• You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vectorfiles, defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files, and Atoll. This way, when you import a vectorfile, Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. For more information aboutdefining the mapping between coordinate systems, please refer to the Administrator Manual.


Atoll User Manual

3. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data inthe current Atoll document.

4. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document.

3.3.3.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo DatabaseYou can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files.

To import the MSI Planet® geo database:


2. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (seeFigure 3.69).

3. For each type of data that you want to import:

a. Select the corresponding check box

b. If you want to embed the data, select the Embed check box.

c. To locate the MSI Planet® index file, click . The Open dialogue appears.

d. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. The path and name of the file appears in the correspondingfield of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.

4. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import, click OK. The data is imported into the currentAtoll document.

Figure 3.68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file

Figure 3.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database



3.3.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data FileYou can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. The image must be in TIFformat. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. Before you import them, you can arrangethem by placing on top the image that is the most important, such as roads. Or, you can place the least transparent imagetowards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible.

The image will be referenced in the document; it can not be embedded. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system(for example, the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported. Beforeimporting an image from a WMS server, you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the sameprojection system supported by the server. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinatesystem as that used by the Atoll document itself.

To import a geographic data file from a web map service:


2. From the Files of Type list, select Connection to a Web Map Services server. The Web Map Services DataImport dialogue appears.

3. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly.

4. Click the Connect button. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information availablealong with a description of the service (Figure 3.70 on page 101).

5. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue, navigate to the item you want to import by clickingthe Expand button ( ) to open each level.

6. Select either the image you want to import, or the image group, i.e., a group preceded by an Expand button ( ).

7. Click for each image you want to import. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web MapServices Data Import dialogue.

8. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking

to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. The images will be imported as a single objectand their appearance will depend on the order you define here.

9. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. The following information is given about the imported WMS data:

- Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected.- Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given.

10. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. If desired, you can modify this name.

11. Click Import. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. You can not embed a WMS image inyour document.

Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll.ini file. For information on defining these entries, see the Administrator Manual.

Figure 3.70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue

Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by

selecting it in the right pane and clicking .


Atoll User Manual

If you had selected more than one image or an image group, Atoll imports the group as a single object. You cannot modify this object. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the importprocess again.

3.3.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in FoldersBy default, when you import scanned images and contours, lines, and points, they appear directly on the Geo tab. Otherdata files, such as clutter classes, are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. You can, however, group scannedimages and contours, lines, and points into folders as well.

Once grouped, these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. They retain, however, their ownindividual display settings; the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level.

You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. When you import the next geo datafile, either raster or vector, you can import it directly into the new folder.

To create a new geo data folder when importing:


2. Select the geo data file and click Open. If the file to be imported is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears(see Figure 3.64). If the file to be imported is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.67).

3. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue), selectNew folder in Geo. The New Folder dialogue appears.

4. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK.

5. Click Import. Your file is imported into the newly created folder.

You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue)or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import.

3.3.6 Embedding Geographic DataBy default, when you import a geo data file, Atoll creates a link to the file. You can, however, choose to embed the geodata file in your Atoll document, either when you import it or later. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file, the geo data fileremains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. When the geo data fileis embedded in the Atoll document, it is saved as part of the document.

Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.

To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing:

• Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box.

To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document:


2. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document.


4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue.

5. Click Embed.

6. Click OK. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document.

3.3.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data FileBy default, when you import a geo data file, Atoll creates a link to the file; the geo data file remains separate and modifyingor saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. If, however, the geo data file is moved, the link will bebroken. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file, Atoll cannot find the file and displays theerror message shown in Figure 3.71.

Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab, you can select New folder in Data.

Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab, or vice versa. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo.

Important: If you are using distributed calculations, you must link your geo data files. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files. For information, see the Administrator Manual.



To find the file yourself:

• When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3.71) appears, click the Browse button to locate the geo datafile.

Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. It searches for the nearest match, based on size, date, and type.When it finds a possible match, it informs you with a message (see Figure 3.72).

If the file corresponds to the source file:

• Click Yes. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file.

You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document.

To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document:


- If the geo data file is in a folder, such as the Clutter Classes, Traffic, or DTM folder, click to expand thefolder.

2. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. The context menu appears.


4. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue, click the Find button.

5. Browse to the geo data file, select it and click OK.

3.4 Digital Terrain ModelsThe Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level.

To manage the properties of the DTM:


2. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder.


4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM.

- For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

5. Move the Relief slider towards Flat, if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to empha-sise the differences in altitude.

6. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.

3.5 Clutter ClassesThe clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use.

Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutterclass, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutterclass, however this height is only an average per class. A clutter height map can represent height much more accuratelybecause it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. For information on clutter height maps, see"Clutter Heights" on page 106.

Figure 3.71: Missing shortcut

Figure 3.72: Problem with shortcut


Atoll User Manual


• "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104• "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104• "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105• "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105• "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105.

3.5.1 Assigning Names to Clutter ClassesThe clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. To make it easier to work with clutter classes, you can assigna descriptive name to each clutter class name. When a clutter class has a descriptive name, it is the name that appearsin tool tips and reports.

When you import a clutter class file in BIL, TIF, JPEG 2000, or IMP format, Atoll can automatically assign names to clutterclasses if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes andtheir corresponding names. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file, see the TechnicalReference Guide.

To assign names to clutter classes:


2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.


4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.

5. In the Name column, enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column.

3.5.2 Defining Clutter Class PropertiesThe parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiverlocation. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue:

To define clutter class properties:




4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.

5. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code.

6. If desired, you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document:

- For all Atoll documents:

- Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability.

- Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions, point analysis, andMonte Carlo simulations.

- TD-SCDMA

7. Click the Default Values tab. Enter default values for each field. For information about each field, see the descrip-tions in the previous step.

The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. Even if there is a clutterclasses map, you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll usethe values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class.

8. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. In addition to the Display tab optionsdescribed in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21, each clutter class display type has a visibility check box.By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide clutter class display types individually.

Important: If the Height field is left blank, propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map.

Note: Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS, UMTS HSPA, CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO, and TD-SCDMA documents. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. For more information, contact support.



9. Click OK.

3.5.3 Adding a Clutter ClassYou can add a new clutter class to your document.

To add a new clutter class to the your document:




4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue.

5. In the blank row marked with at the bottom of the table, enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Codecolumn.

6. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. and step 6. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" onpage 104.

7. Click OK.

You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map. For information on modifying the clutter classmap, see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114.

3.5.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter ClassesUnder certain circumstances, it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Prop-erties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. For example, if you have imported two clutter class files and then deletedone of them, the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file, even if they are not used in theremaining file. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current, you can refresh the list.

To refresh the list of the clutter classes:




4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue.

5. Click Refresh. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list.

6. Click OK.

3.5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter ClassYou can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. Atoll displays the surface areacovered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one, in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, ifthere is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire docu-ment. This information is also available in prediction reports.

To display the surface area covered by each clutter class:



3. Select Statistics from the context menu.

The Statistics dialogue appears, displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage(% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone, if one exists.

Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent.

Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. To copy the description table, select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document, press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table.

% of I Si

Sk

k

-------------- 100=


Atoll User Manual

3.6 Clutter HeightsClutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracybecause they allow more than one height per clutter class. In a clutter height file, a height is given for each point on themap. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes, the height is given as an average per clutter class.

When a clutter height file is available, Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagationmodels (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model), for display (in tool tips and in the status line), and for CW meas-urements and test mobile data paths. If no clutter height file exists, Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter classas defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104).

To manage the properties of clutter heights:


2. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder.


4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights.

- For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

5. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.

The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in thestatus bar.

3.7 Contours, Lines, and PointsIn Atoll, you can import or create vector objects such as contours, lines, and points. The imported or created vectors areused primarily for display purposes, but polygons can be used as filters, or computation or focus zones.

In an Atoll document, vector objects such as contours, lines, and points are arranged in vector layers. When you importa vector file, with, for example, roads, Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file.The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. For information on working with data tables, see "Workingwith Data Tables" on page 41.


• "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106• "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106• "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107.

3.7.1 Managing the Display of a Vector LayerImported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. Atoll can use additional infor-mation related to vectors as display parameters. In addition, Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data.

To manage the display of a vector layer:

1. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located.

2. Right-click the vector layer. The context menu appears.


4. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Propertiesof Objects" on page 21.

3.7.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector LayerThe properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectorsand their attributes or from the Properties dialogue.

Vector Layer Table

All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table.

To open the vector layer table:


2. Select Open Table from the context menu. The vector table appears.

Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.



You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit, Format, and Recordsmenus. For more information on editing tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41.

Vector Layer Properties Dialogue

The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab, a Table tab, and a Display tab.

To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer:



3. Click the General tab. The following options are available:

- Name: The name of the vector layer. You can rename the vector layer using this field. - Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document; otherwise the

file is described as embedded.

- Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed.- Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document.

- Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked, the coordinate system used is the file’s, as specified whenthe file was imported. When the a vector layer is embedded, the coordinate system used is document’s, asspecified when the file was embedded.

- Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer.

- Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. For information on sorting, see"Advanced Sorting" on page 61.

- Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. For information on filtering, see"Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63.

4. Click the Table tab. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. For information on theTable tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42.

5. Click the Display tab. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. For information on the Tabletab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

3.7.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data TabIn Atoll, all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on theGeo tab. You may wish, however, to ensure that certain geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads, etc.,remain visible in the map window. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placingit above data such as predictions.

To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window:


2. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. The context menu appears.

3. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab.

You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geotab from the context menu. For more information about display priority in Atoll, see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" onpage 109.

3.8 Scanned ImagesScanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps orsatellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps.They have noeffect on calculations.


• "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107• "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108.

3.8.1 Importing Several Scanned ImagesYou can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time, as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files"on page 96, or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. The index fileis a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line.

Each line contains the following information, with the information separated by a space:

• File name: The name of the file, with its path relative to the current location of the index file.• XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file.• XMAX: The end X coordinate, calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width).• YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file.


Atoll User Manual

• YMAX: The end Y coordinate, calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width).• 0: The zero character ends the sequence.

To import an index

1. Select File > Import.

2. Select the index file and click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.64).

3. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.

4. Click Import. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

3.8.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned ImagesBecause imported images cannot be modified, they have fewer display parameters than other object types.

To define the display properties of a scanned image:

1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window

2. Right-click the scanned image. The context menu appears.

3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3.73).

4. Select the Display tab and set the following options:

- Colour: Select either Automatic, Shades of gray, or Watermark from the list.- Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white

to be transparent, allowing objects in lower layers to be visible.- Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image.- Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast.- Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text

box. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range, the scanned image is not displayed.

5. Click OK.

3.9 Geoclimatic MapsGeoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density, vapour density,temperature, and refractivity. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.


• "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109• "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109.

nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0

XMIN XMAX YMAXYMIN 0File name

Figure 3.73: Scanned image Properties dialogue



3.9.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map PropertiesTo manage the properties of a geoclimatic map:

1. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.


3. The following tabs are available:

- Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is partof the geoclimatic map. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column, with the relevant dataselected in the Field column. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column.

- Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. Valueinterval is the only available display type.

For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

4. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.

5. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.


7. Click the Table tab. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. For information onworking with the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42.

3.9.2 Displaying Geoclimatic StatisticsYou can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in thedisplay properties (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimaticmap. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and,if there is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document.

To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data:


2. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.

3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each valueinterval.

3.10 Setting the Priority of Geo DataAtoll lists the imported DTM, clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for eachimported vector data file and scanned image. Each object is placed on a separate layer. Thus, there are as many layersas imported objects. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of theExplorer window.

It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayedover all objects on the Geo tab.

3.10.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo DataThere are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data:

• The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether

or not the object is displayed on the map. If the check box is selected ( ), the object is displayed; if the check

box is cleared ( ), the object is not displayed. If the check box, is selected but shaded ( ), not all objects in thefolder are displayed. For more information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" onpage 16.

• The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. Dataon layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objectson the top layer. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab ofthe Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab.

Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.


Atoll User Manual

• The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and someobject types, such as clutter classes, to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. For more informa-tion, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23.

• The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only in themap window if the scale, as displayed on the zoom toolbar, is within this range. For more information, see "Definingthe Visibility Scale" on page 23.

In Figure 3.74, vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS, COASTLINE, RIVERLAKE, MAJORROADS,MAJORSTREETS, RAILWAYS and AIRPORT), clutter classes, DTM and scanned image have been imported and aUMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. In the map window, the linear objects(ROADS, RIVERLAKE, etc.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. The clutter class layer is visible inthe area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). On the other hand, the DTM layer which is beneaththe clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer, are not visible.

3.10.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in CalculationsThe priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display.

When you make calculations in Atoll, the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes, DTM, etc.) is the datafrom the top down. In other words, Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higherlevels; what is used is what is seen.

Object folders, for example, the DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, and traffic density folders, can contain more than onedata object. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or differentresolutions. Therefore for each folder, you should place the objects with the best data at the top. These are normally theobjects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. For example, when calculating coverage in an urbanarea, you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core, where the density of usersis higher, and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. In this case, by placing the clutter class file for thedowntown core over the file with the lower resolution, Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutterclass file with the higher resolution, using the second file for all other calculations.

Population maps and custom geo data maps, both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules ofcalculation priority.

Note: All objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. Vector geo data, however, can be transferred to the Data tab, where they can be placed over data such as predictions. In this way, you can ensure that certain vector geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads, etc., remain visible in the map window For more information, see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107.

Figure 3.74: Displaying Geo data layers

Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ), so that the object is not displayed on the map, it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports, and for custom geo data maps.



The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll:

• "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111• "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111• "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111.

3.10.2.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different AreasIn this example, there are two imported DTM files:

• "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m.• “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m.

In this example, the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap; inboth Case 1 and Case 2, Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account.

Figure 3.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas

3.10.2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same AreaIn this example, there are two imported maps:

• A clutter class map called “Clutter.”• A DTM map called “DTM”.

Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window, Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calcula-tions. In Case 1, the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map. In Case 2, the DTM map is on top of the clutter classmap. In both Case 1 and Case 2, Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations.

Figure 3.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area

3.10.2.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common AreaIn this example, there are two imported clutter classes maps:

• "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m.• "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1"

In the case of two clutter class maps, Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of theExplorer window to decide which data to use. In Case 1, "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1". Atoll will therefore use thedata in "Clutter 2" where it is available, and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by

Explorer window Work space

Case 1

DTM• DTM 2 (20m)• DTM 1 (50m)

Case 2

DTM• DTM 1 (50m)• DTM 2 (20m)


Case 1

Clutter classes• ClutterDTM• DTM

Case 2

DTM• DTMClutter classes• Clutter


Atoll User Manual

"Clutter 2." In Case 2, "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2." Therefore, Atoll will only use the data from"Clutter 1."

Figure 3.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area

3.11 Displaying Information About Geo DataYou can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. For information on how to display information in tool-tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.

To display information about the geo data in a tool tip:

• Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. The surface area is only given for closed polygons.

3.12 Geographic Data SetsIn Atoll, once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters, you can save much of this information ina user configuration file. Then, another user, working on a similar Atoll document, can import the configuration file contain-ing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters.

When you export the geographic data set, you export:

• the paths of imported geographic maps• map display settings (visibility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.)• clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss, orthogonality factor, percentage pilot

finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoor loss) • raster or user profile traffic map description.


• "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112• "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113.

3.12.1 Exporting a Geo Data SetWhen you export a geo data set in a user configuration file, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112is saved into an external file.


Case 1

Clutter classes• Clutter 2 (20m)• Clutter 1 (50m)

Case 2

Clutter classes• Clutter 2 (50m)• Clutter 1 (20m)

Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar has been selected.

Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well. For information, see the Administrator Manual.

Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.



To export a geo data set in a user configuration file:

1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3.78).

2. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the Geographic Data Set check box.

3. Click OK, The Save As dialogue appears.

4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name.

5. Click OK.

3.12.2 Importing a Geo Data SetWhen you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" onpage 112 is imported into your current Atoll document.

To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set:


2. Browse to the user configuration file, select it and click Open.

3. The User Configuration dialogue appears.

When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set, Atoll checks if there are alreadygeographic data in the current Atoll document. If so, the option Delete existing geo data appears with otheroptions in the User Configuration dialogue.

4. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the check boxes of the items you want to import.

5. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any importeddata, select the Delete existing geo data check box.

If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data, clear the Delete existing geo data check box.

6. Click OK.

3.13 Editing Geographic DataIn Atoll, you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by, for example, adding a vector layerto the Population folder and then adding polygons.

The following types of geographic data can be edited:

• Clutter classes (for more information, "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114)• Contours, lines, and points (for more information, "Editing Polygons, Lines, and Points" on page 34)• Population maps (if they are in vector format, i.e., Erdas Imagine (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, or TAB format)

(for more information, "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115)• Geoclimatic maps (for more information, "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115)• Traffic data maps• Custom data maps (for more information, "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115).

Figure 3.78: The User Configuration dialogue

Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file.


Atoll User Manual

3.13.1 Editing Clutter Class MapsClutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons.


• "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114• "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114• "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115.• "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115

3.13.1.1 Creating a Clutter PolygonIn Atoll, you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. Youcan later edit and export the polygons you have created. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken intoaccount by propagation model calculations.

To create a polygon:


2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears.

3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list, a polygon drawing tool

, a polygon deletion tool , and a Close button (see Figure 3.79).

4. From the list, select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.

5. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). The pointer changes to a pencil ( ).

6. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon.

7. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.

8. Double-click to close the polygon.

3.13.1.2 Editing Clutter PolygonsYou can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points.

To edit clutter polygons:



3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.79).

4. Select the polygon. You can now edit the clutter polygon by:

- Moving a point:



- Adding a point:

i. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the border at the positionof the pointer.

- Deleting a point:



Figure 3.79: Editor toolbar

Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue.

Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.



3.13.1.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter PolygonsTo display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area:




4. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears with thecoordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area.

3.13.1.4 Deleting Clutter PolygonsYou can delete clutter polygons.

To delete a clutter polygon:




4. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). The pointer changes ( ).

5. Click the polygon you want to delete. The polygon is deleted.

3.13.2 Editing Geoclimatic MapsSome geographic data maps, for example, geoclimatic maps, are made up of individual vector objects. You can modifyand create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours, lines, and points) tothis layer.

To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map:


2. Right-click the geo data object, the Geoclimatic Parameters, folder, to which you want to add a vector layer.

3. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selectedgeo data object folder.

4. Right-click the new vector layer. The context menu appears.


6. To draw a polygon, click the New Polygon button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar:

a. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.

b. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.

c. Double-click to close the contour.

7. To draw a rectangle, click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar:

a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle.

b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle.

c. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners.

8. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu.

9. Enter a value:

- Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for thepolygon.

10. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar.

11. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map, you must map the vector layer. Right-click thethe Geoclimatic Parameters, folder. The context menu appears.

Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon.

Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 17.


Atoll User Manual


13. Click the Data Mapping tab. For the following geo data:

- Geoclimatic Parameters:

- In the Field column, "Rain" is selected by default.

You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons, Lines, and Points" on page 34.

3.14 Saving Geographic DataAtoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. Atoll supports a variety ofboth raster and vector file formats (for more information, see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). Savinga geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to:

• Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data, you canexport them to a new external file.

• Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data typein Atoll, you can save these changes to the source file.

• Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab, you can savethem as one file.

• Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save afile to an external file, in the same format or in another one.

• Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save theselected part as a new file.


• "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116• "Updating the Source File" on page 117• "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118• "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118• "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119

3.14.1 Saving Modifications to an External FileIn Atoll, you can save your modifications to an external file.


• "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116• "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117.

3.14.1.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format FileYou can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file, either in the same format as used in the current Atolldocument, or in a different raster format. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data, the part containingthe computation zone, or just your modifications to the geo data.

When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file, exporting either the entire geo data or just your modi-fications allows you to save those modifications to an external file.

To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file:



3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.

4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and selectthe file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats:

- BMP: When you select bitmap format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing thegeoreference information.

- TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export; no corresponding geo-reference file is created.- TIF: When you select tagged image file format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file con-

taining the georeference information.- BIL: When you select the BIL format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the

georeference information. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.- JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format, no corresponding geo-reference file is created.- GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. When exporting in GRD or GRC

formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.

5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.80).



6. Under Region, select one of the following:

- The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file, including anymodifications you have made to the geo data. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in thecurrent Atoll document.

- Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you havemade to the clutter classes. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classesgeo data folder.

- The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangleencompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported geo datafile will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder.

7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Thesuggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria:

- If one object has been modified, the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object.- If several objects have been modified, the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified

objects.- If there is no initial clutter class object, the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps.- If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM, no other clutter class geo data

file, or traffic objects, the suggested resolution is 100 m.

8. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.

3.14.1.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format FileYou can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. A vector layer can contain contours, lines, and points. Alongwith vector layers you have added to the Geo tab, the following maps can be exported as vector format files:

• Vector-format population maps• Vector-format geoclimatic maps• Vector-format custom maps.

Once you save a vector layer, the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. You can embed the file afterwards(see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102).

To export a vector layer:



3. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and selectthe file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats:

- AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. As a format created for Atoll, Atoll canread AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats.

- SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons; it cannot savevectors made of lines or points. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points, use either the AGD, theMIF or the TAB format.

- MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats.

4. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. The Vector Export dialogue appears, displaying the current coordinatesystem and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change.

5. Click Export. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported filereplaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file.

3.14.2 Updating the Source FileWhile working on an Atoll document, you may make changes to geo data. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atolldocument, Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. If the geo data file is linked, Atoll promptsyou to save the changes when you close the document.

Figure 3.80: Export dialogue


Atoll User Manual

To update the source file of a linked geo data file:


2. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. The context menu appears.

3. Select Save from the context menu. The linked file is updated.

3.14.3 Combining Several Files into One FileIn certain circumstances, for example, after importing an MSI Planet® index file, you may have several geo data files ofthe same type. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. The files will be combined according to theirorder from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. If the files overlap on the map, the combinedfile will show the file on the top.

You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types:

• Digital terrain model• Clutter classes • Clutter heights • Scanned maps

To combine individual files into a new file:


2. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. The context menu appears.


4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list.

5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.81).

6. Under Region, select The Entire Project Area. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geodata files, including any modifications you have made to the geo data.

7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Thesuggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects.

8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.

3.14.4 Exporting an Embedded FileYou can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document, or in a different application. When youexport an embedded file, Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file.

To export an embedded geo data file:


2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears.



5. Click OK.

If the geo data file is a vector file, the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.81).

Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. Therefore, ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. If you do not want to replace the current file, you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117).



a. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. To change the coordinate system usedfor the exported file, click Change. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. For information on the Co-ordinate Systems dialogue, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82.

b. Click Export. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system.

If the geo data file is a raster file, the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.82).

a. Under Region, select one of the following:

- The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file, includingany modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported file will replace the embedded file in theGeo data tab.

- Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications youhave made to the geo data. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.

- The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encom-passing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported file will beadded as an object in the geo data folder.

b. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.

c. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.

3.14.5 Creating a New File from a Larger FileYou can create a new file from a section of a larger file. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document, or in a newAtoll document. To create a new file, you must first define the area by creating a computation zone.

You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types:

• Digital terrain model• Clutter classes• Clutter heights• Scanned maps• Population• Geoclimatic maps

To create a new file from a section of a larger file:


2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears.



5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.81).

Figure 3.81: The Vector Export dialogue

Figure 3.82: Export dialogue


Atoll User Manual

6. Under Region, select The Computation Zone. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rec-tangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported geodata file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder.

7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.

8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.


Chapter 4

Antennas and Equipment

Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment

4 Antennas and EquipmentIn Atoll, the equipment used to create a network is modelled, along with the characteristics which have a bearing onnetwork performance.

This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables:

• "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123• "Defining Antennas" on page 123• "Microwave Equipment" on page 127• "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137• "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138.

4.1 Defining the List of ManufacturersIn Atoll, the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment, waveguides, and antennas are listed in the Manufacturerstable.

To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.


4. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. The Manufacturers table appears.

5. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon

( ):

- Name: The name of the manufacturer.- Comments: Any comments.

6. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

4.2 Defining AntennasIn Atoll, each microwave antenna is identified by a name, and defined by the operating frequency band, manufacturername, horizontal and vertical antenna patterns, gain, and antenna diameter.

The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatibleantenna/equipment sets.

Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas, i.e., horizontal and vertical plane diagrams forhorizontal and vertical polarization. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined.

Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized, Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams whendetermining propagation.

In this section the following are described:

• "Creating an Antenna" on page 123• "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125• "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125• "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126.

4.2.1 Creating an AntennaThe microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves.Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas. As well, Atoll enables you to create newantennas and set the parameters of each (i.e., name, manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and diame-ter).

To create an antenna:




4. Select Antennas > New from the context menu. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears.

5. Click the General tab. You can enter information in the following fields:

Tip: When you create a new antenna, you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor.


Atoll User Manual

- Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. You can modify the name Atoll entersif you wish.

- Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer.- Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with.- Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain.- Diameter: The diameter of the antenna.- Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD), displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical

polarisations.

- Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polarsection, for the horizontal polarisation.

- Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polarsection, for the vertical polarisation.

- Comments: Any additional information on the antenna.

6. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna.

A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. On each of the four tabs of the antenna propertiesdialogue, you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna:

- Horizontal polarisation - Horizontal plane:

- Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontalplane.

- Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontalplane.

- Horizontal polarisation - Vertical plane:

- Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane.- Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane.

- Vertical polarisation - Horizontal plane:

- Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane.- Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal

plane.

- Vertical polarisation - Vertical plane:

- Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.- Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.

a. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern.

b. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern.

c. Copy the selected data.

d. Switch to Atoll.

e. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern.

f. Paste the data in the table.

- If there are some blank rows in the data sheet, Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a completeand realistic pattern.

- When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available, Atoll calculates a linear inter-polation from the existing pattern values.

g. Click Apply to display the pattern.

7. Click OK.

If some values are missing in the data sheet, Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic patternaround the antenna. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue, Atoll removesblank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button. When you calculate along an angle for which no data isavailable, Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values.

Figure 4.83: Copying horizontal pattern values



4.2.2 Importing Microwave AntennasAtoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum

Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.89.003 and WG16.99.0501.

To import antenna files:




4. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears.

5. In the Data Import dialogue, choose one of the following options:

- One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file.- Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.

6. Click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.

7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.

8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported.

Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays howmany files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer.

Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency. The averageoperating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency - Minimum Frequency)/2. The antenna diameter is calculatedusing the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %:

, which gives:

For more information on antenna file formats, see the Technical Reference Guide.

4.2.3 Editing Microwave Antenna PatternsIn Atoll, you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antennaand replace the antenna patterns of another antenna:

• "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125• "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126.

Editing a Single Radiation Pattern

You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna.

To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna:




4. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears.

5. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. The contextmenu appears.

6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears.

7. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue,see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123).

8. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table.

1. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16.99.050), see the following website:http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp.html.

Gain dBi 20 Log Diametre m 20 Frequency MHz 42.2–+=

Diametre m 10

Gain dBi 20

---------------------------- 2.11 LogMax Frequency Min Frequency–

2--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- –+

=

Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas

Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Anten-nas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another.

To open the MW Antennas table:





By resizing row height and column width, you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them(see Figure 4.84).

5. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy, select the cell with the pattern.

6. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell.

7. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to, select the cell with the pattern.

8. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern.

Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table.

4.2.4 Printing Microwave Antenna PatternsTo print the pattern of a microwave antenna:





5. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print.

6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.

7. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print:

- H Polar. - H Plane: Horizontal polarization - horizontal plane- H Polar. - V Plane: Horizontal polarization - vertical plane - V Polar. - H Plane: Vertical polarization - horizontal plane - V Polar. - V Plane: Vertical polarization - vertical plane

8. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu.

Figure 4.84: MW Antennas table

Notes:• You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s

Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu.• Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as

defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. You can define the display byright-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmicdisplay from the context menu.



9. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.

4.3 Microwave EquipmentMicrowave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can thenbe transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received todata. The microwave radio system, as well as the equipment that constitute it, is composed of three main sub-systems:

• Indoor unit (IDU)• Outdoor unit (ODU)• Antenna

Indoor Unit (IDU)

The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. Itconsists of the following components:

• The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal• The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU)

Outdoor Unit (ODU)

The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriateradio band and channel for radio transmission.

Antenna

The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the airand receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. The antenna can bein one of many different shapes (for example, horn, parabolic, flat or planar, lens, yagi, or array) to achieve its specificobjectives.

The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following:

• Directivity: In practical terms, directivity is defined as:

- The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction- The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions.

• Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminalsof the antenna.

• Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radi-ated in the opposite direction, typically between 35 and 50 dB. In general, the higher the gain of the antenna, thehigher the FBR.

• Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. The portion ofthe pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern

• Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of thewave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). Using polarisation enables the same radio fre-quency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another.

Figure 4.85: Radio system components


Atoll User Manual

• Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation tothe power received in undesired polarisation. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of theantenna pattern.

For more information on antennas, see "Defining Antennas" on page 123.


• "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128• "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132• "Advanced Configuration" on page 132.

4.3.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in AtollIn Atoll, the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. Microwave transceiver equipment isused to manage output power, power control, modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signalsreceived at the antenna, to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates usingtrunk types with defined digital hierarchy.

The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. You can createa new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table, and then define its parameters using its Propertiesdialogue.

To create a piece of microwave equipment:




4. Select Equipment > New from the context menu. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogueappears.

5. On the General tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters:

- Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment.- Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use.- Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list.

128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below:

4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below:

- Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure.- Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum

improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF).

The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain sig-nal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. Max ATPC alsoenables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. TheMax ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations.

The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC(cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from theundesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation dis-crimination factor (XPD). XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB.

- Specify the System Configuration (i.e., the equipment protection configuration). The system configuration isdefined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standbychannels. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. Switching to the standbychannel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. If the system mustbe manually switched to the standby channel, the system is called a "cold" standby system. If a hot standbysystem is available, you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. For a hot standby system, thestandby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. For cold standby systems, the

Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation

Figure 4.86: Polarisation



standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. Frequencies allocated to active and standbychannels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue.

1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below:

In this system configuration, only the main equipment is active and on. The other equipment, which will serveas a back-up in case the main equipment fails, is not turned on.

1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below:

In this system configuration, both the main and standby equipment are on, but only the main equipment is ac-tive. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails.

- Under Radio Signature, choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) dueto multipath fading.

This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i.e., produce accept-able errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading.

This information is available from the manufacturer.

- Normalised: For a normalised signature, select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. TheKn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used.

- Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times, select Rummler model,and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases. For more

information, see studies by C.W. Lundgren and W.D. Rummler2 and the ITU P.530 recommendation.

6. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters:

- Under Digital Hierarchy, select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH).

- Under Rate, select the Capacity (i.e., the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list.

Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment.

Figure 4.87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times

Modulation Kn

64-QAM 15.4

16-QAM 5.5

8-PSK 7

4-PSK 1

Kn values (without adaptive equalization)

2. C.W. Lundgren and W.D. Rummler, "Digital radio outage due to selective fading- observation vs. prediction fromlaboratory simulations," Bell System Technical Journal, pp. 1073-1100, May-June 1979.W.D. Rummler, "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios," IEEE Globecom Proceedings, pp.1727-1732, 1988.


Atoll User Manual

The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks:

The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy andRate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the man-ufacturer in the From manufacturer text box.

7. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters:

- Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM), define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. Enter thereceiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). This willbe used to calculate the thermal fade margin.

- Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E), define the Overflow Threshold. The overflowthreshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. It is used to calculate the margin againstenhancements.

- Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD), you can define how the MXPD is cal-culated:

- Calculated C/I min.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I, select Calculated C/I min., and definean interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. Atoll will calculates the re-quired quality based on the user-defined interference margin.

- User-defined C/I min.: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I, select User-defined C/I min., and define aninterference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box, as well as the quality required

for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes.

8. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters:

- Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (ReceptionFilter):

- For each circulator present on this piece of equipment, set the Port it is attached to, and define the losses onTransmission and Reception.

9. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters:

- Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment andcorresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. The MTBF is availablefrom the equipment manufacturer.

- Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximumamount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. The Hot Standby



Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Propertiesdialogue. Furthermore, when you define the properties for a link, you must indicate which channel will be usedas a backup in case of main equipment failure. For more information on defining link properties, see "Definitionof a Microwave Link" on page 185.

10. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue, define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking theInitialise from standard graphs button, to let Atoll create the mask from standard values, or by defining an atten-uation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment man-ufacturer.

The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right.

11. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue, define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise fromstandard graphs button, to let Atoll create the mask from standard values, or by defining an attenuation in dB(Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer.

The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right.

12. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue, define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking theInitialise from standard graphs button, to let Atoll create the graph from standard values, or by defining an atten-uation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment man-ufacturer.

The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines thevulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. It is provided by the manufacturer. The T/I graphdefines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitterand victim receivers. For each interfering transmitter, the received power level in dB is compared to the maximumpower level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. This is done instead of calculating C/I values andcomparing them to the published objectives.

The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right.

13. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment.

You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues.

To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment:




4. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears.

5. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears.

6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogueappears.

7. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section.


Atoll User Manual

4.3.2 Importing Microwave EquipmentAtoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formatdefined by the recommendation WG 21.99.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4.0).

NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM. Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files withthe extension RAF. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations. In this case, theT/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theo-retical graphs table. For more information on the theoretical graphs, see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136.

For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats, see the Technical Reference Guide.

To import equipment files:




4. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears.

5. In the Data Import dialogue, choose one of the following options:

- One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file.- Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.

6. Click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.

7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.

8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported.

4.3.3 Advanced ConfigurationAtoll offers several advanced configuration options:

• "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132• "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133• "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136.

4.3.3.1 Digital HierarchiesAtoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies.

The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transportequipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequencybut are not synchronised with each other; in other words, the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streamsdo not coincide.

The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates, but the basic principles of multi-plexing are the same.

The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transportdigital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. Due to thesynchronous nature of the SDH, the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same.

The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. The frame formats and thus the datarates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature.

In Atoll, digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is aparameter of microwave equipment. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equip-ment. For example, a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of trans-ferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate.

The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies.

Creating a Microwave Trunk Type

Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available, but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters.

Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported.

Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data, it can take a long time. However, if you have the data available in tabular format, you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table.



To create a microwave trunk type:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder

3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu. The Trunk Types table appears (seeFigure 4.88).

5. For each trunk type you define, add the following data:

- Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy.- SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ), the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET. If the

check box is not selected ( ), the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH.- Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic.- Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i.e., the rate of the useful bits

not including the overheads bits).- No. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i.e., the useful bits

plus the overheads bits).- BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2, Table 2) of the ITU-R

P.530-8 recommendation.

You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue.

To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue:

• Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. The trunk type’s Properties dialogueappears (see Figure 4.89).

4.3.3.2 Interference Reduction FactorAs the name indicates, the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal.The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal.You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protec-tion levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).

Figure 4.88: Trunk Types table

Figure 4.89: Trunk type Properties dialogue


Atoll User Manual

The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. When studying the interferencebetween transmission equipment and reception equipment, Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for thetransmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If so, Atoll uses it. Otherwise, Atoll determines the IRFgraph during the process of calculating interference. Atoll proceeds as follows:

1. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacityand modulation. If so, Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined forthe equipment if available, or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs, see"Theoretical Graphs" on page 136).

2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity, or modulation are not the same, Atoll merges the transmitter mask andthe receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for theequipment if available, or the theoretical graphs if not.


• "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134• "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135.

The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll.

Defining IRF Graphs Manually

You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victimand interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference.

To create or modify an IRF graph:




4. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. The Trunk Types table appears (seeFigure 4.90).

5. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list.

6. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.

7. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4.91).

Figure 4.90: IRF table

Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph, use the row marked with the New Row icon ( )

Figure 4.91: IRF record Properties dialogue



8. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (inMHz). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.

9. Click OK.

Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant

Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Whenyou select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band,Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference.

To use the assistant to define IRFs:




4. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4.90).

5. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayedin the grid.

6. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufac-turer are displayed in the grid.

7. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufac-turer are displayed in the grid.

8. You can now define an IRF graph, delete an IRF graph, or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theo-retical graphs:

Figure 4.92: IRF Setting dialogue


Atoll User Manual

To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment:

a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears.

b. Select Add Record from the context menu. A dialogue appears.

c. Under Enter graph values, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The resultinggraph is displayed on the right of the dialogue.

d. Click OK.

To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment:


b. Select Delete from the context menu.

To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoreticalgraphs:


b. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears.

c. Under Transmitter Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined forthe equipment, or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequencyband of the transmission equipment.

d. Under Reception Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for theequipment, or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band ofthe reception equipment.

e. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz).

f. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph.

g. Click OK.

9. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue.

4.3.3.3 Theoretical GraphsAtoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i.e., wheninformation about the transmitter mask, the receiver mask, or T/I graph is missing). These theoretical graphs can describeeither the transmitter mask, or the receiver mask, or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer, frequency band, bandwidth, rate,and modulation. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask, the receiver mask, the T/Igraph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. Default theoretical graphs are available for differ-

ent frequency bands and bandwidths.3

Creating Theoretical Graphs

A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditionsof C/I. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference.

To create a theoretical graph:


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.


4. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. The Theoretical Graphs table appears.

5. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. The context menu appears.

6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears.

7. Click the General tab and define the following parameters:

- Name: The name of the theoretical graph.- Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define. It can be either a transmitter mask, or a receiver

mask, or a T/I graph.- Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid.- Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid.- Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid.- Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid.- Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid.

3. T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www.radio.gov.uk and transmitter and receiver masks havebeen found at http:\\www.ero.dk.

Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the

New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.



8. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph.

- If the graph describes the transmitter mask, define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as afunction of the frequency spacing (in MHz).

- If the graph describes the receiver mask, define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a func-tion of the frequency spacing (in MHz).

- If the graph is a T/I graph, define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).

9. Click OK.

4.4 Microwave Waveguides and CablesWaveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipmentto the microwave antenna.

Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube, called a waveguide, with very low attenuation. The waveguide isdesigned for a specific wavelength. Hence, the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. Theelectric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide, and therefore there is no radiation loss. Since the dielectric isair, the dielectric losses are also negligible. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies, called the cut-offfrequency.

Cables, on the other hand, have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor.The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. The dielectric material is usually air or foam. These are quite robustand therefore easy to install. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area; the thicker the cable, the lower the loss. Cableloss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m.

The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll:

• "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137• "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138.

4.4.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and CablesIn Atoll, microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length.Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined, you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission andreception.

To create a microwave waveguide or cable:




4. Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. The MWGuides New Element Properties dia-logue appears (see Figure 4.93).

5. For the new waveguide or cable, define the following parameters:

- Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.

- Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Prop-erties dialogue of the selected frequency band.

Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data, it can take a long time. However, if you have the data available in tabular format, you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. For information on the MWGuides table, see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138.

Figure 4.93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue


Atoll User Manual

- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Propertiesdialogue of the selected manufacturer.

- Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m.- Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. You can select from Cable, Circular, Elliptic, Other, or Rectan-

gular.

6. Click OK.

4.4.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or CableIn Atoll, you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table.

To modify a microwave waveguide or cable:




4. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. The Waveguides and Cables tableappears.

5. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. The context menu appears.

6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The record’s Properties dialogue appears.

7. For the waveguide or cable, you can modify the following parameters:

- Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.

- Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Prop-erties dialogue of the selected frequency band.

- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Propertiesdialogue of the selected manufacturer.

- Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m.- Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. You can select from Cable, Circular, Elliptic, Other, or Rectan-

gular.

8. Click OK.

4.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide CompatibilityAtoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas, equipment, and waveguides. The defined compatible antenna/equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link. You can definecompatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or youcan use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility.


• "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138• "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139.

4.5.1 Defining Compatibility ManuallyIn Atoll, you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to definewhich microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible withwhich equipment.


• "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138• "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139

4.5.1.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility TableYou can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides. Whenyou define the properties (i.e., antennas, equipment, and waveguides) of a microwave link, these compatibility definitionscan be used to display only compatible antennas, equipment, and waveguides as options in lists.

To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table:






4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna/Guides Com-patibility table appears.

5. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row

marked with the New Row icon ( ). The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MWAntennas table and the MWGuides table, respectively. You can also, if desired, enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue.

4.5.1.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility TableYou can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. If youhave previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs, these are taken into account and, by default, a piece ofequipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna. When youdefine the properties (i.e., antennas, equipment, and waveguides) of a microwave link, these compatibility definitions canbe used in order to display only compatible antennas, equipment, and waveguides as options in lists.

To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table:




4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna/EquipmentCompatibility table appears.

5. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the

row marked with the New Row icon ( ). The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from theMW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table, respectively. You can also, if desired, enter a Comment bydouble-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue.

4.5.2 Using Assistants to Define CompatibilityAtoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and whichmicrowave antennas are compatible with which equipment.


• "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139• "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140.

4.5.2.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide CompatibilityAtoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. The assistant gives youan overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band.

To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides:




4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu. A dialogue appears.

5. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency

band are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selectedfrequency band.

6. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are

displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-turer.

7. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is dis-

played in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-turer.

Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter, you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu, or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table.

Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter, you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu, or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table.


Atoll User Manual

8. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatibleantenna-waveguide pair:

To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide:


b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna andwaveguide are compatible.

To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair:


b. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is no longer marked in green.

9. Click OK.

You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antenna-waveguide pairs.

4.5.2.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment CompatibilityAtoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. The assistant gives youan overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band.

To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment:




4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. A dialogue appears.

5. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency

band are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selectedfrequency band.

6. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are


7. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is




8. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment, delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair, or define compatibility with an antenna, a piece of equipment, and waveguides:

To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment:


b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equip-ment are compatible.

To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair:


b. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is no longer marked in green.

To define compatibility with an antenna, a piece of equipment, and waveguides:

a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. The contextmenu appears.

b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equip-ment are compatible.

c. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. The properties dialogueopens.

d. In the properties dialogue, under List of the Compatible Guides, select the waveguides that you want tomake compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs, these are taken into account and, by default, the waveguides compatible with the corre-sponding antenna are selected.

e. Click OK to close the properties dialogue.

9. Click OK.

You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antenna-equipment pairs.


Atoll User Manual


Chapter 5

Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands


Atoll User Manual

Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands

5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bandsWhen planning a microwave link network, Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands. By definingfrequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network. Each frequency band is in turndivided into a number of frequency sub-bands. Frequency sub-bands are standardised, ITU-compliant divisions of afrequency band, breaking it into channels.

In this chapter, managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained:

• "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145• "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146• "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147.

5.1 Microwave Frequency BandsMicrowave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz). The length of a microwave length is dependent uponthe frequency: as the frequency increases, the length of the microwave link decreases. The characteristics of microwavefrequency bands are different depending on the frequency.

The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations:

Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types:

• "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145• "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146• "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146.

5.1.1 Long-Haul Frequency BandA long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km. Long-haulfrequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading.

The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands.

ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band

ITU-R F.385-7 7 GHz

ITU-R F.386-6 8 GHz

ITU-R F.747-0 10 GHz







Frequency Band

Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used

2 GHz 80 km Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Horizontal and vertical

7 GHz 50 km Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 46.8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical

10 GHz 45 km Multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical


Atoll User Manual

5.1.2 Medium-Haul Frequency BandA medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km.Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading.

The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands.

5.1.3 Short-Haul Frequency BandA short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km. Short-haulfrequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in theband).

The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands.

5.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency BandsMicrowave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll. There must be at least one frequency band that can be assignedto microwave links that are created. By default, Atoll includes several pre-defined, ITU-compliant frequency bands.

To create or modify a frequency band:


2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

3. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu. The Frequency Bands table appears (seeFigure 5.94).

Frequency Band


13 GHz 40 km Multipath fadingFrom 60 to 120 cm for a gain of

36.4-42.4 dBHorizontal and vertical

15 GHz 35 km Multipath fading From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical

18 GHza 20 kmRain and multipath

fadingFrom 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical

a. At 18 GHz, the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0.1 dB per km. and attenuation dueto rain of approximately 1 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading.

Frequency Band


23 GHza 18 kmRain and multipath

fadingFrom 30 to 120 cm for a gain of

35.5-47.3 dBHorizontal and vertical

26 GHz and

27 GHza 15 km Rain fading From 30 to 60 cm Horizontal and vertical

38 GHzb 10 km Rain fading 30 cm for a gain of 39.66 dB Vertical

55 GHzc A few kilometers Rain fading 15 cm Vertical

58 GHzd A few kilometers Rain fading 15 cm Vertical

a. At 23 GHz, 26 GHz, and 27 GHz, there is atmospheric attenuation of 0.1 dB per km. and attenuation dueto rain of approximately 3 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour. At 23 GHz, there is multipath fading aswell.

b. At 38 GHz, there is atmospheric attenuation of 0.1 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately3 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour.

c. At 55 GHz, there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately7 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour.

d. At 58 GHz, there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately7 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour.


Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands

4. To create a frequency band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ):

- Name: The name of the frequency band.- Min. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz).- Max. Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz).- Comments: Any comments.

5. To modify a frequency band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bandsFrequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands. Frequency sub-bands are standardised, ITU-compliant divi-sions of a frequency band, breaking it into channels. ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-banddefined for a single frequency band.

A frequency sub-band has two half-bands. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the otherhalf-band in the other direction. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands.

You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. Atoll automatically generatesa channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands.

To create or modify a frequency sub-band:



3. Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu. The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears(see Figure 5.95).

Figure 5.94: The Frequency Bands table

Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations.

Figure 5.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table


Atoll User Manual

4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ):

- Name: The name of the frequency sub-band.- Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs.- Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz).- Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz).- Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz).- First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band.- Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band.- Step: The step between channels.

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-bandYou can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In thisexample, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used.

On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values:

• Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band).• Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz• Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz

• Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m")• First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12")• Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12")• Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747

Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts.


Chapter 6

Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual


Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6 Managing Calculations in AtollOnce you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions:

• "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151• "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154• "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1 Using Propagation Models in Microwave ProjectsThe following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects:

• Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and todetermine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" onpage 151.

• Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For moreinformation, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1 Working with the Microwave Propagation ModelThe Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculatingattenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due todiffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must beassigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159.

The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Prop-agation Model Properties dialogue.

To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model:

1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears.


5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Under Heights, you can set the following parameter:

- Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information intoaccount when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height intoaccount, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it usesaverage clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters:

- K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters:

- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab


Atoll User Manual

- Deygout- Epstein-Peterson- Deygout with correction- Millington- ITU 452-11- Full Deygout

- K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction.

Under Tropospheric Scatter, you can set the following parameters:

- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering:

- No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated.- ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%,

90%, or 99.99% of the time.- ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations.- Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation.

- N0: Enter the value for N0, which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. - Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calcu-

late the tropospheric scatter loss.

Under Vegetation, you can set the following parameters:

- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation:

- No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated.- ITU-R P.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P.833-4 recommendations.

- A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient.- Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum

attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. The maximumattenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation.

The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for informa-tion only. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation.

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.99).

Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class:

- Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver sitefor each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Bothground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distancearound the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only onthe DTM.

7. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class. Clutter categories are taken into considerationwhen studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. Clutter categoriesare ITU-standardised clutter classes. For information on clutter categories, see "Global Parameters" onpage 156.Click OK.

For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

Figure 6.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Clutter tab



6.1.2 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 ModelThe Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physicalcharacteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculatinginterference.

Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159.

The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-RP.452 Model Properties dialogue.

To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model:

1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears.


5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Under Heights, you can set the following parameter:

- Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information intoaccount when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height intoaccount, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it usesaverage clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter:

- Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is notexceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter:

- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interferingtransmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver:

- ITU-R P.452-12- Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab


Atoll User Manual

Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class:

- Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver sitefor each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Bothground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distancearound the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only onthe DTM.

7. Click OK.

For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance ObjectivesIn this section, the following are explained:

• "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154• "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1 Microwave Link ClassesMicrowave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performanceobjectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters andusage limitations to the selected microwave links.

To create or modify a microwave link class:



3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears.

4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class.

Each link class has the following parameters:

- Name: The name of the link class- Type: The type of link class (International or National)- Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.)- Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 andG.826 recommendations.

6.2.2 Defining Performance ObjectivesThe ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performanceevents. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab



performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave errorperformance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include:

• ESR• SESR• BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error perform-ance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections:

• "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155• "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155• "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events

Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events:

• Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits.• Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect.• Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.

SES is a subset of ES.

• Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters

The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available

(Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is

in the available state. The parameters are:

• Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed meas-urement interval.

• Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time duringa fixed measurement interval.

• Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocksin available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parame-ters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 andG.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives

The performance objectives serve two main goals:

• Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expectederror performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipmentdesign.

• Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipmentand systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasi-ble network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, althoughexpressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1 Defining Quality ObjectivesUsing different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevantquality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the qualityparameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by theminimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by itsminimum and maximum bit rates.

Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can alsodefine customised quality objectives.

To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective:



Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.


Atoll User Manual

3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears.

You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective.

- To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826)and modify the properties of the quality objective.

- To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the

row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

4. Click OK.

6.2.2.2 Defining Availability ObjectivesUsing different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link classinAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of therelevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour ofthe availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn,limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also char-acterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You canalso define customised availability objectives.

To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective:



3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogueappears.

You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective.

- To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITUG.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective.

- To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the

row marked with the New Row icon ( ).

4. Click OK.

6.3 Defining Calculation ParametersIn a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into:

• Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information onsetting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156.

• Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting linkparameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations:

• Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see"Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151.

• Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see"Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1 Global ParametersThe global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the MicrowaveRadio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for:

• Quality and availability analysis• Objective selection• Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interfer-ence calculation:



3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.



4. Click the General tab. On the General tab, the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: qualityand availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation.

Under Calculation Parameters, you can define the following parameters:

- K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses:

- Median value for each link: If you select this option, a median value for the K factor will be used for eachlink in link analyses.

- Same value for all links: If you select this option, the value you enter will be used as the K factor for alllinks in link analyses.

- Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power controlon the transmitted signal is to be considered.

Under Results, you can define the following parameters:

- The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B, B >> A, or both.

- Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port, select which channel should be displayed the results of a linkanalysis:

- All: If you select All, Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels.- Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering, Atoll performs the link analysis

for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i.e., the channel withthe lowest margin).

- Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering, Atoll performs the link analysis anddisplays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B.

Under BER, you can define the following options:

- Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value.

- Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value.- Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link, Atoll performs the link analysis

using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link.- Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links, you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2

that Atoll will use for all links.

5. Click the Interference tab. On the Interference tab, the parameters you define will be used for interference calcu-lation.

Under Interferer Filtering, you can define the following parameters:

- Max. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find poten-tially interfering sites.

- Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers. You can choose from the fol-lowing options:

- Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. Atoll considers co-channelinterference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed theinterfered bandwidth.

- User-defined Percentage: If you select this option, you can enter the percentage of the interfered band-width that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. Therefore, if you keep the default value of250%, a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interferedfrequencies does not exceed 2.5 times the interfered bandwidth.

- No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers.

- Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration.- Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore inter-

ference generated by channels of the same link on each other. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0configuration (i.e., links with two channels). It also applies to parallel links. In this context, parallel links arereferred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e.g., two links between the same two sites).

Under Calculation Parameters, you can define the following parameters:

- Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on, alwaysoff or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation.

- Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area.- Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if

you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver.

Under Result filtering, you can define the following parameters:

- Min. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold. Results that do not meet thethreshold will not be displayed.

- Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none, on the uplink or downlink, oron both the uplink and downlink.

6. Click the Models tab. On the Models tab, the parameters you define will be used for quality and availabilityanalysis.

Note: No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected.


Atoll User Manual

Under Availability, you can define the following parameters:

- Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability. Six availability analysis methods (Crane andthose based on different implemented ITU recommendations, 530-5, 530-8, 530-10, 530-11 and 530-12) areavailable.

- Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. Two attenuation models for rain (ITUrecommendations, 838-1 and 838-3) are available.

Under Quality, you can define the following parameters:

- Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett, K.Q factor, ITU-R P.530-5, ITU-RP.530-8, ITU-R P.530-10, ITU-R P.530-11, or ITU-R P.530-12.

If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530 recommendations, you can set further parametersunder ITU-R P.530.

- Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P.530-10, ITU-R P.530-11, or ITU-R P.530-12,you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimaticfactor (K). If you select Vigants-Barnett, you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplifiedmethod or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).

- ITU-R P.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530 recommendations under Method,you can set the following parameters:

Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation, select the Ignore Signal Enhancements checkbox if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. Reduction ofXPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rainwhereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only.

Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signalt (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions.

Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for theResidual Bit Error Rate (RBER), number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES andfor Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER.

- K.Q. Method: If you selected K.Q. method based under Method, you can set the following parameters:

Frequency Exponent: Under K.Q. Method, define the exponent of the frequency.

Distance: Under K.Q. Method, define the distance.

7. Click the Objectives tab. On the Objectives tab, the parameters you define will select objectives.

Under Performance Objectives Selection, you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected.The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T

G.821 or ITU-T G.826 recommendations or a customised objective). Clicking the Browse button ( ) besidethe Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion.

Under Availability Objectives Apportionment, you can define the ratio between the different objectives consid-ered in the global availability objective. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact onpropagation), to equipment failure, or it can be random. Therefore, the global availability objective consists of threepartial objectives for which you can define a weight. These weights are taken into consideration when calculatingthe performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and theunavailability due to equipment failures.

8. Click the Clutter Categories tab. On the Clutter Categories tab, the parameters you define will be used to analysereflection and calculate vegetation losses.

This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec. ITU-R P.1058-2 and their characteristics. For each clutter cate-gory, you can define the following parameters:

- Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this cluttercategory as relection areas.

- Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutterclasses with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage.

- Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to considerall clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage.

- Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec. ITU-R P. 527-3. The type of ground is used to deter-mine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis. The following are the avail-able types of ground:

- A: sea water (average salinity), 20°C- B: wet ground- C: fresh water, 20°C- D: medium dry ground- E: very dry ground- F: pure water, 20°C- G: ice (fresh water)

9. Click OK.



6.3.2 Link ParametersThe link parameters which affect calculations are the following:

• Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which thelink is operating, including climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature,water vapour density, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K.

• Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. Underideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. In practice, this performancelevel is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with theequipment.

• Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the inter-fering signal. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculatethe quality and availability of the microwave link. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link, the targetvalues for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used.

• Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. By assigning the link class with the appro-priate performance objectives, you assign the performance objectives to the link. For information on creating a linkclass, see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.

The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwavelinks or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. Defining calculation parameters is explained inthe following sections:

• "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159• "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163• "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165.

6.3.2.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave LinkYou set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatictab, the Reliability tab, and the Propagation tab.

To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link:



3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.

4. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. The context menu appears.


The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General, Radio, Connections, Geoclimatic, Reliability,Propagation, and Display. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic, Reliability, and Propa-gation tabs and are described here. For an explanation of the options available on the General, Radio, Connec-tions, and Display tabs, see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management".

6. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6.102).

Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.


Atoll User Manual

7. On the Geoclimatic tab, you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link:

Current Methods: Under Current Methods, you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the micro-wave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the MicrowaveRadio Links Properties dialogue. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality andavailability methods. To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected,click the Display All button under Current Methods.

- Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions, you can define theconditions under which the microwave operates:

- Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link oper-ates. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of theMicrowave Radio Links Properties dialogue.

When using Crane as the availability calculation method, you can select the following climatic zones:

When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method, you can choose between Warm and Humid,Temperate and Dry.

- Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. Clicking the

button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature

Figure 6.102: Microwave link Properties dialogue - Geoclimatic tab

Climatic Zone Type Crane Global Rain ZonePolar (Dry)

Dry

A

Polar (Moderate) B

Cold (Dry) B1

Temperate Continental (Dry) D1

Subtropical Arid (Dry) F

Cold (Moderate)Continental

B2

Temperate Continental (Moderate) D2

Temperate Continental (Wet) Continental humid D3

Temperate Maritime

Humid

C

Subtropical Wet E

Tropical Moderate G

Tropical H



based on Rec. ITU-R P.1510-0, ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the temperature set in the geocli-matic file.

- Rec. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec. ITU-R P.530 are those recommended by ITU-RP.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link:

Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( )beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour den-sity based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined watervapour density is exceeded), or based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the water vapourdensity set in the geoclimatic file. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals(hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3.

Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year (or,

in other words, the rainfall observed 99.99% of the average year). Clicking the button ( ) beside theRainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfallexceeded 0.01% of the average year based on Rec. ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of theaverage year set in the geoclimatic file.

Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button

( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospher-ic pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the atmospheric pressure set in thegeoclimatic file.

Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour den-sity.

Rec. ITU-R P.530-12: Under ITU-R P.530-12, you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres.The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm.

Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainheight based on Rec. ITU-R P.839-3 (and select a season), or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.

- Refractivity: Under Refractivity, you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in

N-units per km. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text boxopens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. ITU-R P.453-9, using a user-defined reference altitude, or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m., as well as the percentage of the yearthat N is not exceeded, or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file.

Under Refractivity, the k factor median value, calculated using the set parameters, is displayed.

- Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of themicrowave link and are broken down by calculation method. Under Geoclimatic Factor, you can set the fol-lowing parameters:

- ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett, you can selectthe Terrain Type. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Modelstab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. If you are using ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 meth-ods, you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowestantenna in the link is lower than 700 m; "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of thelowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m; "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water; or"Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. If you are using using the Vigants-Barnett method, you can choose between "Flat Terrain", "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain".

- ITU-R P.530-5, -8: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8, you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time therelative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps.

This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5 and ITU-R P.530-8 calculation methods.

- K.Q. Method: Under K.Q. Method, you can define K.Q. for the K.Q method. K models geo-climatic andterrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance andfrequency.

- ITU-R P.530: Under ITU-R P.530, you can define the K factor. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects

on climate. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the Kfactor based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a valuefor C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km forthe worst average month) or based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified methodwhere you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year orselect the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient andthe terrain roughness).

- Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selectedon the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. If you select User-defined underMultipath Occurence, you can enter the C factor value, the propagation condition factor for the Vigants-Barnett method. If you select Simplified Method, Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to thedefined climate zone. Finally, if you select Terrain-based Method, Atoll displays the C factor value cor-responding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain rough-ness into account.


Atoll User Manual

8. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6.103).

9. On the Reliability tab, you can define reliability-related parameters:

- Link Class: Under Link Class, you can select the link class. Each link class can have different performanceobjectives. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives, you assign the perform-ance objectives to the link. For information on creating a link class, see "Microwave Link Classes" onpage 154.

Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.

Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectivesof the selected link class.

- Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate, you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atolldisplays the resultingsensitivity for each BER.

If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment, Atoll will interpolate todetermine the corresponding sensitivity.

- Availability: Under Availability, you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair). The MTTR is taken into accountwhen calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channelsystem.

10. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6.104).

Figure 6.103: Microwave link Properties dialogue - Reliability tab



11. On the Propagation tab, you can define propagation-related parameters:

- Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal, you can select the propagationmodel that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability forthe microwave link. If no propagation model is selected, the quality and availability of the link will be definedby the respective target values defined in the link class.

- Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal, you can select thepropagation model that will be used to calculate interference.

12. Click OK.

6.3.2.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave LinksUnder certain circumstances, for example, in a highly homogeneous network, you will want to set the same calculationparameters for all microwave links. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same timeby first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to allmicrowave links.

To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links:

1. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, as described in "Defining Calculation Parametersfor a Single Microwave Link" on page 159.

2. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links.

To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links:




4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears.

5. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated.

In the Links Table, the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwavelink’s Properties dialogue are:

- Geoclimatic tab:

- Environment Type- R001 (mm/h)- Geoclimatic Factor (K)

Figure 6.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue- Propagation tab


Atoll User Manual

- PL (%)- Water Vapour (g/m3)- Temperature (°C)- Factor K.Q- Rain Height (m)- Atmospheric Pressure (hPa)- Refractivity- Factor C- Climatic Zone

- Reliability tab:

- Class (EPO)- Hot Standby- BER- 2nd BER- MTTR (h)

- Propagation tab:

- Propagation Model- Interference Model

6. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into all cells above themodified cell:

7. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link.

8. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into the cells below themodified cell:

a. Click the modified cell.

b. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

c. Select Edit > Fill > Up.

The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.



9. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link.

6.3.2.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave LinksUnder certain circumstances, for example, in a network that spans a great distance, you will want to set the same calcu-lation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. You can set the same calculation parametersfor defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, sorting themicrowave links according to their common attributes, and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave linksin that group.

To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links:

1. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, as described in "Defining Calculation Parametersfor a Single Microwave Link" on page 159.

2. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by:

- Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165)- Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166)- Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168)

3. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links.

Grouping Microwave Links

To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping:




4. From the Group By submenu, select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. Ensure thatyou chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculationparameters have in common.

The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property.


b. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy thedata.

c. Select Edit > Fill > Down.



Atoll User Manual

5. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. The context menu appears.


7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group asexplained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163.

Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters, you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folderand selecting Group By > None from the context menu.

Sorting Microwave Links

To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters:





5. Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. The context menu appears.

6. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu.

7. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated.

In the Links Table, the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwavelink’s Properties dialogue are:

- Geoclimatic tab:

- Environment Type- R001 (mm/h)- Geoclimatic Factor (K)- PL (%)- Water Vapour (g/m3)- Temperature (°C)- Factor K.Q- Rain Height (m)- Atmospheric Pressure (hPa)- Refractivity- Factor C- Climatic Zone

- Reliability tab:

- Class (EPO)- Hot Standby- BER- 2nd BER- MTTR (h)

- Propagation tab:

- Propagation Model- Interference Model

8. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into all cells in the groupabove the modified cell:

b. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57, you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. For information on using the dialogue that appears, see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57.


Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify.



9. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified micro-wave link.

10. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into the cells in thegroup below the modified cell:

b. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

c. Select Edit > Fill > Up.



Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify.

c. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy thedata.

d. Select Edit > Fill > Down.


Atoll User Manual

Filtering Microwave Links

To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters:





You can now filter on a value in the table. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you wantto copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified, or you can usea value these microwave links do not have.

5. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value, press CTRL as you click the other values.

6. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu:

- Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modifythese microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6.105 on page 168).

- Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed. You cannow modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Linkstable(see Figure 6.106 on page 169).


Figure 6.105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz, 220 MHz)



7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group asexplained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163.

Figure 6.106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz, 220 MHz)

Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. For more information on advanced filtering, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63.


Atoll User Manual


Chapter 7

Microwave Link Project Management

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7 Microwave Link Project ManagementThe microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwavelinks module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G(GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects.

Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equip-ment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set targetperformance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets.You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with severallinks (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequencyplanning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancementsinto consideration.

Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies therequired quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link'srobustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number offailures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteriaare described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user toset in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed.

Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., thatthere be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it movesaway from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should bepaid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referredto as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zoneclearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile.

Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sightconnection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atollfully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link.Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled.

Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is dividedinto two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window:

• The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can alsocontain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects.

• The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipointlinks, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sitesfolder.

7.1 Designing a Microwave Link NetworkFigure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning amicrowave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107.

1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( ).

- You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open.- You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( ).

- You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter4: Antennas and Equipment")

- You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate

sites ( ).

- You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175).- You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new can-

didate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( ).

- You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a linktemplate. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing MicrowaveLink Templates" on page 190).

- If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites.- You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

1

2

3

4


Atoll User Manual

5. Analyse the microwave network.

- You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if

necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( ).- You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on

page 203) ( ).

- You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( ).

- You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( ).

6. Plan link channels ( )

- "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve theoptimum solution for the network.

7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( ). After modifying

the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps and again.

7.2 Planning and Optimising Microwave SitesAs described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, orfrom a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modifyexisting ones.

In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify thecharacteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search fornew locations for sites.


• "Creating Sites" on page 174• "Site Survey Tools" on page 176• "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1 Creating SitesWhen you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or moremicrowave links.


• "Site Description" on page 175• "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

5

6

7

8

9

10

7 8



7.2.1.1 Site DescriptionThe parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs:

• The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

- Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want tochange the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual.

- Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the loca-tion of the site.

- Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. Youcan specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use thisvalue for calculations.

- Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want.

- The Pylon tab:

- Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can usethis height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.).

- Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

7.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a SiteYou can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "SiteDescription" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends onwhether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site.

To create or modify a site:

1. If you are creating a new site:

a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.

b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.

c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108on page 175).

2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site:


b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears.

d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears.

3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175.

4. Click OK.

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue

Tip: If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.


Atoll User Manual

7.2.2 Site Survey ToolsAtoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites.

In this section, the following are explained.

• "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176• "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176• "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179• "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180• "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One SiteAtoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window.

To display the line-of-sight area around a site:

1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menuappears.

2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears.

3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters:

- Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration.- Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height.- Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height.- Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following:

- Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between thetransmitter and receiver sites.

- Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of theFresnel ellipsoid and define the following:

- Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. - Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area:

- To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider.- To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the

palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site.

To delete the line-of-sight area around a site:

1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menuappears.

2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate SitesIn Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular siteif one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s)and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For informationon the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using aComputation Zone" on page 30.

To calculate a LOS report for one particular site:

1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menuappears.

2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (seeFigure 7.109).



3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab.

4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined onthe transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height forthe transmitter and the receiver:

- Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use thepylon height defined by site for each line of sight.

- Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in theDefault Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis.

6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values.

7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters:

- Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box ifyou want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight.

- Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Theaverage frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate theline of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set forthe propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following:

- Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating theline of sight between existing sites.

- Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance isused when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole pro-file except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on theDTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fieldsand lets you select other information to be included in the report.

a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears.

b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contig-uous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguousfields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately.

- To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click

to move it to the Selected Fields list.- To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click

to remove it.

- To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Theobjects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab.

10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone ifavailable and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the mapbetween each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report


Atoll User Manual

The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied siteand Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone.

- Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites.- Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites.- Distance (m): The distance between the sites.- Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor

value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage ofpenetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentageof clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110).

- Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second kfactor value.

- Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. - Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. - Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and

the receiving site.- Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu.

To calculate a LOS report for all sites:


2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.

3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.


5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined onthe transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylonheight for the transmitter and the receiver:



6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis.

7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values.


- Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box ifyou want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight.

- Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Theaverage frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.


- Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating theline of sight between sites.


Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip: If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.



10. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fieldsand lets you select other information to be included in the report.





to remove it.


c. Click OK to return to the Table tab.

11. Click OK. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if availableand computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between eachpair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied siteand Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone.

- Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites.- Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites.- Distance: The distance between the sites.- Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor

value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage ofpenetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentageof clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110).

- Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second kfactor value.

- Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. - Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. - Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the

receiving site.

You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folderof the Explorer window’s Data tab.

7.2.2.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two SitesAtoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. The routes can consist of several hopsand have different lengths. If you want, Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. In the anal-ysis, Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll willuse the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for informationon the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30.

To find the best route between two sites:

1. Right-click the target site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The contextmenu appears.

2. Select Routing from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.

3. On the Routing Options tab, define the following parameters:

- Source Site: The starting site. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if thereis no focus zone (for information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for informationon the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30).

- Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites.- Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best

solution in terms of number of hops, i.e. the path containing the least of hops.- Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of

distance, i.e. the shortest path.


5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined onthe transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height forthe transmitter and the receiver:




7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define the first k factor value.


Atoll User Manual


a. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when cal-culating diffraction in the line of sight.

b. Select one of the following:

- Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight betweenthe transmitter and receiver sites.

- Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of theFresnel ellipsoid. Then, define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid andselect the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency ofthe selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box).




10. Click OK. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table.

The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route.

- Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab.- Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site.- Distance: The length of the route.

The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum numberof hops defined in the Routing Options tab.

In addition, Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the TerrainProfile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Lineof Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.

7.2.2.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate SitesIn Atoll, you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites.

To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites:

1. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height

Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following:

- Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site, Atoll will use the pylonheight defined on each site.

- Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class, Atollwill use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dia-logue.

- Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define inthe Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue.

2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar.

3. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click tocreate the first analysis point.

4. Move the pointer to another site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected,click to create the second analysis point.

5. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibilitybox of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone betweenboth sites. By default, Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. Youcan modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. If you do not wantto display the clutter along the profile, you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on theGeo tab.

6. Right-click the Terrain Section tab. The context menu appears.

Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile

button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue, see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176.



7. Select Properties. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears.

8. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue, you have the following parameters:

- Id: The terrain section reference number.- Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. The value can vary between

-100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of theFresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of theFresnel ellipsoid.

- Site1: The Site1 name.- Site2: The Site2 name.- Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2.- Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered.- Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered.- Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered.

9. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters.

If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight BetweenCandidate Sites" on page 176), proceed as follows:

1. On the map, click the terrain section you want to analyse.

2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar.

3. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoidbetween both sites, and terrain height and clutter along the profile. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid, Atolluses the site heights, the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation.

If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map, you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone.


2. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. The Terrain Section Prop-erties dialogue appears.

3. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters:

- Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals."- Under Field, select "Visibility".- You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties,

see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.

4. Click OK.

Then, you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link.

1. On the map, right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design.

2. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder;its properties are based on the selected link template.

7.2.2.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One SiteYou can display a 360° view around each site. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is agood candidate and if it is visible from the other sites.

To perform a 360° view at any site:

1. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The contextmenu appears.

2. Select 360° View from the context menu. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens(see Figure 7.111):


Atoll User Manual

The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. The altitude(in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis. The height of the studiedsite is indicated by a blue dotted line. Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height(i.e. the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site.Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. Each neighbour site is indi-cated by a vertical red line and its symbol. The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude whichincludes the Earth curvature. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver heightdefined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. If the site is entirely visible from the studied site, the line is solid. Ifit is entirely hidden by an obstable, the line is dotted. Finally, if a site is partly visible from the studied site, the visiblepart is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. This representation helpsyou select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on thereceiver site. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights whenthe visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected.

The 360° View tab provides you with the following options:

- To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab. The site is automaticallyselected and centered in the map window.

- To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab. Atolldisplays a tool tip with the following information:

- The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system),- Its distance from the studied site (in m),- The direction (in °),- The altitude (in m),- The curvature of the Earth (in m),- The pylon height (in m).

- To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. The Terrain Section tab of the Micro-wave Link Analysis Tool window opens.

- To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the MicrowaveLink Analysis Tool window.

- To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating

the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the currentpoint in the map window.

- To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicatingthe highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information:

- The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system),- The distance from the studied site (in m),- The direction (in °),

Figure 7.111: 360° View Tool

Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field.



- The altitude (in m),- The curvature of the Earth (in m),- The clutter height at the point (in m).

- To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab andselect 360° View Properties from the context menu. For information on parameters which can be changed,see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183.

- To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available onboth sides of the 360° View tab.

- : Increase the angle of view on the left.

- : Decrease the angle of view on the left.

- : Rotate the angle of view on the left.

- : Increase the angle of view on the right.

- : Decrease the angle of view on the right

- : Rotate the angle of view on the right.

Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters

1. Right-click the 360° view tab. The context menu appears.

2. Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.


4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined onthe transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylonheight for the transmitter and the receiver:



5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site.



a. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when cal-culating diffraction in the line of sight.

b. Select one of the following:


- Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of theFresnel ellipsoid. Then, define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid andselect the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency ofthe selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box).




9. On the Display tab, you can define the following parameters:

- Pylon Height: When you select this option, Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to repre-sent the pylon height defined for the studied site. They are displayed in purple by default.

- Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option, Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted lineby default) to indicate the height of the selected site.

- Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option, Atoll displays the position of other sites within theview. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default).

- Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site.- Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°,

Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°.

10. Click OK.


Atoll User Manual

7.2.3 Search Tools for New SitesAtoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. You can improve the location of a site, in terms of recep-tion and transmission, by letting Atoll find a higher location for it, as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" onpage 19. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create newsites.

Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites

Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. The intersection of line-of-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone, see "Using aComputation Zone" on page 30).

To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection:


2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.

3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.


5. Under Height - Transmitter Side, you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of eachmicrowave link:

- Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use thepylon height defined by site.


6. Under Height - Receiver Side, you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area:

- Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class, Atoll will usethe receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue.

- Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the receiver height you define inthe Default Height box.




a. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box ifyou want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight.

b. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following:


- Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of theFresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

c. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Theaverage frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

10. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate theline-of-sight area. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have setfor the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following:

- Receiver Height: If you want, you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. This is the value that willbe taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height - ReceiverSide on the Calculation Parameters tab.


11. Click the Display tab. On the Display tab, you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map.You can select one of the following display options:

- One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define thecolour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in:

- Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour, Atoll will automatically assign a different colour toeach line-of-sight area, and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site.

- Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour, selecting a colour from the palette, Atoll with display allline-of-sight areas in the same colour, and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sightareas.

Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, by moving the slider.

- Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined numberof sites:



- Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you wantAtoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette.

- Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you wantAtoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette.

- Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to displayall areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette.

12. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. For informationon the Legend window, see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29.

13. Click OK. Atoll displays results on the map.

To delete the line-of-sight areas:

1. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears.

2. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu.

7.3 Creating Microwave LinksA microwave radio link, in Atoll, is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode.Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies, one for transmission and onefor reception. The baseband signal, containing the user data, occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulationscheme used. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end, and is transmittedover the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and60 GHz.

A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas, transceiver equipment, etc., installed at both.Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. A site cansupport one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basingthem on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link.


• "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.• "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188.• "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189.• "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190.• "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190.• "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191.• "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192.• "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192.• "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192.

7.3.1 Definition of a Microwave LinkThe parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialoguehas seven tabs:

• The General tab:

- Name: The name of the microwave link.- Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. If the extremity of the link is

not located exactly on the site, you can modify its position under Antenna Position:

- Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to thesite location, and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets, Dx and Dy, respectively.

- Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position, and thenenter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates, X and Y, respectively.

- Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. If the extremity of thelink is not located exactly on the site, you can modify its position under Antenna Position:

- Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to thesite location, and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets, Dx and Dy, respectively.

- Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions, and thenenter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates, X and Y, respectively.

In Atoll, "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival.

- Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link.- Length: The calculated length.- Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link.- Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link.- Activity: The microwave link activity status. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and inter-

ference analysis.- Comments: Any comment about the microwave link.

• The Radio tab:


Atoll User Manual

- A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B, B>>A: trans-mission from Site B to Site A). Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i.e., to allow com-munication in both ways).

- Under Antennas, you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link

- Model: The antenna model. By default, Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for

the microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the

antenna model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes ( ). In this case,Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table.

- Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres).- Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. This parameter helps Atoll determine which

antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations.- Az./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities.- Tilt./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities.- Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception.- Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on

the site.

- Under Equipment, you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link:

- Model: You can select a piece of equipment. By default, Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequen-cy band defined for the microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button

( ) beside the antenna model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes

( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as definedin the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table.

- Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. This parameter is taken fromthe equipment properties.

- Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power.- Nominal power: The output power after tuning.- ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. This parameter can be

defined for biderectional links only. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equip-ment. ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. For infor-mation on taking power control into consideration, see "Global Parameters" on page 156.

- Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on.- XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Cancel-

ler).

- Under Frequencies, you can define the following parameters:

- Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. By default, Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the mi-

crowave link frequency band. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( )beside the frequency sub-band field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes

( ). In this case, Atoll provides in the list the sub-band, whose frequency spacing corresponds to thestandardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment.

- Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. This value is used when no sub-band isdefined. By default, it equals the central frequency of the frequency band.

- Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site.- Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets.

Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band.- Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. The Ports Definition

dialogue appears. You can configure the channels, transmission and reception port numbers, values fortransmission and reception attenuation, the polarisation and the channel port status. The number of portsyou can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m(where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available asstandby channels).

For further information on port settings, see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189.

• The Connections tab:

- Under Waveguides and Cables, you can select up to two waveguides. For each of them, you can define if itis used either for transmission or reception only, or for both transmission and reception directions and selectthe waveguide model. By default, Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the

microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna

model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes ( ). In this case, Atoll proposes

Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas, radio equipment with 1+1configuration and hot standby, or frequency diversity. For other configurations, portsettings is not mandatory; you can define either the frequency or the sub-band andchannels.



in the list, waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables. You can also enter the length ofeach waveguide. Atoll displays the attenuation.

- Under Connection Losses, you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission, recep-tion, or on both transmission and reception. You can also add a Shielding Factor.

• The Geoclimatic tab:

- Current Methods: Under Current Methods, you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the micro-wave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the MicrowaveRadio Links Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Global Parameters" on page 156.

The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. To access allgeoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected, click the Display All button available underCurrent Methods.

The different geoclimatic parameters are described below:

- Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions, you can define theconditions under which the microwave operates:

- Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link oper-ates. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of theMicrowave Radio Links Properties dialogue.

When using Crane as the availability calculation method, you can select the following climatic zones:

When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method, you can choose between Warm and Hu-mid, Temperate and Dry.

- Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. Clicking the

button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperaturebased on Rec. ITU-R P.1510-0, ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the temperature set in the geocli-matic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file, see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.

- Rec. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec. ITU-R P.530 are those recommended by ITU-RP.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link:

Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( )beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour den-sity based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined watervapour density is exceeded), or based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the water vapourdensity set in the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file, see "Geoclimatic Maps" onpage 108. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated usingyour data and based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3.

Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year (or,

in other words, the rainfall observed 99.99% of the average year). Clicking the button ( ) beside theRainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfallexceeded 0.01% of the average year based on Rec. ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of theaverage year set in the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file, see "GeoclimaticMaps" on page 108.

Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button

( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospher-ic pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the atmospheric pressure set in thegeoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file, see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.

Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour den-sity.

Rec. ITU-R P.530-12: Under ITU-R P.530-12, you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres.The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm.

Climatic Zone Type Crane Global Rain ZonePolar (Dry)

Dry

A

Polar (Moderate) B

Cold (Dry) B1

Temperate Continental (Dry) D1

Subtropical Arid (Dry) F

Cold (Moderate)Continental

B2

Temperate Continental (Moderate) D2

Temperate Continental (Wet) Continental humid D3

Temperate Maritime

Humid

C

Subtropical Wet E

Tropical Moderate G

Tropical H


Atoll User Manual

Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainheight based on Rec. ITU-R P.839-3 (and select a season), or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.For more information on the geoclimatic file, see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.

- Refractivity: Under Refractivity, you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in

N-units per km. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text boxopens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. ITU-R P.453-9, using a user-defined reference altitude, or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m., as well as the percentage of the yearthat N is not exceeded, or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geo-climatic file, see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.

Under Refractivity, the k factor median value, calculated using the set parameters, is displayed.

- Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of themicrowave link and are broken down by calculation method. Under Geoclimatic Factor, you can set the fol-lowing parameters:

- ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett, you can selectthe Terrain Type. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Modelstab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. If you are using ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 meth-ods, you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowestantenna in the link is lower than 700 m, "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of thelowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m, "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and"Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. If you are using using the Vigants-Barnett method, you can choose between "Flat Terrain", "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain".

- ITU-R P.530-5, -8: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8, you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time therelative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps.

- K.Q. Method: Under K.Q. Method, you can define K.Q. for the K.Q method. K models geo-climatic andterrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance andfrequency.

- ITU-R P.530: Under ITU-R P.530, you can define the K factor. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects

on climate. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the Kfactor based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a valuefor C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km forthe worst average month) or based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified methodwhere you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year orselect the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient andthe terrain roughness).

- Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on theModels tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. If you select the User-defined optionunder Multipath Occurence, you can enter the C factor value, the propagation condition factor for Vi-gants-Barnett method. If you select the Simplified Method option, Atolldisplays the C factor value corre-sponding to the defined climate zone. If you select the Terrain-based Method option, Atoll displays theC factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take theterrain roughness into account.

• The Reliability tab:

- Link Class: Under Link Class, you can select the link class. Each link class can have different performanceobjectives. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives, you assign the perform-ance objectives to the link. For information on creating a link class, see "Microwave Link Classes" onpage 154.

Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.

Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectivesof the selected link class.

- Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate, you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atoll displays theresulting sensitivity for each BER.

• The Propagation tab, you can define propagation-related parameters:- Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal, you can select the propagation

model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability forthe microwave link. If no propagation model is selected, the quality and availability of the link will be definedby the respective target values defined in the link class.

- Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal, you can select thepropagation model that will be used to calculate interference.

• The Display tab, you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities.

7.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave LinkYou can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link. You can access the properties of amicrowave link, described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185, through the microwave link’s Properties



dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modi-fying an existing microwave link.

To create or modify a microwave link:

1. If you are creating a new microwave link:


b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.

c. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.

d. Select New from the context menu. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears.




c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.

d. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. The context menu appears.

e. Select Properties from the context menu. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears.

3. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.

4. Click OK.

7.3.3 Defining Port ParametersIn Atoll, ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas, radioequipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby, or frequency diversity. For other configurations, port settings is notmandatory; you can define either a frequency or the channels used. You can configure port parameters for an individualmicrowave link or for all microwave links.

To define port parameters for a single microwave link:




4. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. The context menu appears.


6. Select the Radio tab.

7. Under Frequencies, select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link.

8. Click Apply. Additional parameters appear.

9. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA.

10. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. The Ports Definition dialogue appears.

11. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction:

- Channel: The channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets.- Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10.- Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10.- Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB.- Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB.- Polarisation: The signal polarisation.- Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"), "Standby" for a standby channel (channel

"m"), "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. In case of frequency diversity, two channels with diversitystatus are required.

The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannotexceed n+m.

After defining the configuration for one direction, you can define the opposite direction by clicking the InitialiseSymmetrically button.

12. Click OK. The Ports Definition dialogue closes.

13. Click OK.

To define port parameters for all microwave links:

1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.


3. Select Ports > Open table. The table opens.

Define the following parameters:

- Link: the name of the microwave link.


Atoll User Manual

- Way: the link direction (AB or BA).- Channel: the channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets.- Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10.- Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10.- Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB.- Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB.- Polarisation: the signal polarisation.- Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"), "Standby" for a standby channel (channel

"m"), "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. In case of frequency diversity, two channels with diversitystatus are required.

7.3.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link TemplateWith Atoll, you can create new microwave links based on link templates. This allows you to build your network quickly withconsistent parameters.

You can create a microwave link in the following ways:

• Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template,• On two existing sites using a link template,

To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template:

1. In the Microwave toolbar, select a link template from the list.

2. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.

3. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. The pointer changes ( ).

The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sitesautomatically at the location you clicked on the map. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, trans-mitters, and passive repeaters.

4. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites:

a. Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. The pointer now changes ( ).

b. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link.

5. If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites:

a. In the map window, click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. The site is

now one extremity of the microwave link. The pointer now changes ( ).

b. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it.The microwave link is now created between the two sites.

To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template:

1. In the Microwave toolbar, select a link template from the list.

2. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.

3. Select Between Sites from the menu. The Link Creation dialogue appears.

4. In the Link Creation dialogue, define the following parameters:

- Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link.- Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link.- Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link.

5. Click OK.

By default, Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY, where SiteX is the nameof the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created).

7.3.5 Managing Microwave Link TemplatesAtoll comes with microwave link templates, but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. The tools forworking with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7.112).


• "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191• "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191

Figure 7.112: The Microwave toolbar



• "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191

7.3.5.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link TemplateYou can create a link template based on an existing microwave link.

To create a link template based on an existing microwave link

1. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. The context menu appears.

2. Select Save As A Template from the context menu.

The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. It is available in the list ofthe Microwave toolbar.

You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. The newlink template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing link template thatmost closely resembles the link template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the param-eters that differ.

As well, you can modify the properties of any link template.

To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template:

1. In the Microwave toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.

2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.

3. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one:

- To create a new link template: Under Available Templates, select the link template that most closely resem-bles the link template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears.

- To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates, select the link template whose propertiesyou want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.

4. For information on the fields available in the open window, see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave LinksDirectly on the Map" on page 191.

5. Click OK.

The new link template will be available in the template menu.

7.3.5.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link TemplateTo add, modify or delete a field in the link templates:

1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.


3. Click the Fields button.

4. In the dialogue that appears, click the Add button to add a field, the Properties button to modify properties, or theDelete button to delete a user-defined field.

5. Click OK.

7.3.5.3 Deleting a Microwave Link TemplateTo delete a link template:

1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.


3. Under Available Templates, select the template you want to delete.

4. Click the Delete button. The link template is deleted.

5. Click OK.

7.3.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the MapIn Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorerwindow. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab, althoughit might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from themap. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity, clicking them in themap window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site. You can also change the position of the site bydragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.

Note: If you add a field to the link templates, you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account.


Atoll User Manual

Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment":

• "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18• "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19• "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19• "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19• "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19• "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20• "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20.

7.3.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and LinksAtoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. This enables you not onlyto display selected information, but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance.

The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links:

• Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or microwave link, in the form of a labelthat is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table,including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you wouldwant to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining thelabel, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23.

• Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or microwave link, in the form of atooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more informationthan in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You candisplay information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For informa-tion on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24.

• Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link.For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands, or to distinguishinactive from active microwave links. For information on defining the microwave link colour, see "Defining the Dis-play Type" on page 22.

7.3.8 Checking Data ConsistencyYou can perform an audit of the microwave link network. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of somedata.

To perform an audit of the microwave link network:

1. Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu. The Microwave Data Checkdialogue appears.

2. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue, define the parameters of the audit:

- Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify:

- Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency.- Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined, excluded channels must belong to

the list of channels and at least one channel must be available.- Link definition: at least one direction must be selected, the frequency defined must be within the frequency

band limits, the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment,the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band, the frequency band of antennas, equip-ment, waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and, the antennavertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctlyaligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at thepattern electrical tilt angle, and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the verticalpattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle. Pattern attenuations are considered thesame if they differ less than 1 dB.)

- Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i.e.,multi-hops with no link), undefined point-to-multipoints (i.e., point-to-multipoints with no link), or unusedrepeaters.

- Other (XPIC, Antenna Separation, etc.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that:

- XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link.- Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link.

- List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition todetected inconsistencies.

3. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer.

7.3.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll DocumentWhen you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are respon-sible. For example, a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You,however, might be responsible for the planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing engineering and interferencestudies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict



engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only theresults you need.

In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied, each with its own advantages:

• Filtering the desired sites and microwave links

You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites andmicrowave links according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteriain several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vectorpolygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71. This enablesyou to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study.

For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 62.

• Setting a computation zone

Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied, limits the number of sitesand microwave links to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations.

For information on computation zones, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30.

You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwavelinks to be studied.

In addition, it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets, interference).For information on focus zones, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31.

7.4 Analysing the Path ProfileMicrowave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. In thissection, the following are explained:

• "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193.• "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200.• "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201.

7.4.1 Displaying the Path ProfileIn this section, the following are explained:

• "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.• "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194.• "Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194.• "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194.• "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195.• "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195.• "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197

7.4.1.1 Viewing a Microwave Link ProfileIn Atoll, you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. Before studying a microwave link, you must configure itsantennas, equipment, its frequency band, and the propagation model you want to use. You can make a microwave linkprofile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window:

1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Datatab. The context menu appears.

2. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu.

You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( ) inthe toolbar.

The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. Itincludes any passive repeaters composing the link. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distanceon the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites, with agreen line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes andclutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. If you do not want todisplay the clutter along the profile, you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab.Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line(if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoidthe most. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak.

When a repeater is inserted on the link, it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile. At the top of theMicrowave Link Analysis Tool window, you can select which part of the profile you want to display:

• Site A ==> Site P• Site P ==> Site B• Site B ==> Site P


Atoll User Manual

• Site P ==> Site A• Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P)• Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P)

When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link, the profile display options include Site Q as well.

You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu:

• Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.

7.4.1.2 Studying Microwave Link ClearanceThe Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. When displaying the clearance, you canhide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link.

To hide or display the Fresnel zones:

1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" onpage 193.

2. Select the microwave link to analyse.

3. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. The context menu appears.

4. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu.

You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor). These values can

be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list. Atoll displays the clear-ance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. In addition, it indicates the tilts/direct ray, theazimuths, and the angles of incidence for both antennas.

The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue, while the second related to the second k valueis shown in red. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. Ifthere are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses, a green coloured line is drawn from the trans-mitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle thatintroduces the highest loss in the link, and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular.

A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depictthe minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids, both first andsecond, you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters.

Here, it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically, this feature isdescribed in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section.

7.4.1.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display OptionsThe Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of theprofile.

To open the microwave link profile display options window:




4. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears.

5. On the Display tab, you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which thecurvature of the Earth is displayed.

6. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab, you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellip-soids to be shown, and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites.

7. On the Reflection tab, you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not, and reflection paths youwant to display, either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones.

8. Click OK.

7.4.1.4 Zooming In on the ProfileAtoll enables you to zoom in on the profile.

Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed, the clearance is referred to as F, F1 forthe first k factor value and F2 for the second one. When the percentage of the Fresnelellipsoid is different from 100%, the clearance is referred to as F’, F’1 for the first k factorvalue and F’2 for the second one.



To zoom in on the Profile:




4. Select Zoom In from the context menu.

5. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.


To restore the initial profile:




4. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.

7.4.1.5 Printing a Microwave Link ProfileYou can print a microwave link profile.

To print the content of the Profile tab:




4. Select Print from the context menu.


7.4.1.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the ProfileYou can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the MicrowaveLink Analysis Tool.


• "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195• "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196

7.4.1.6.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each PointYou can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwavelink profile. Atoll displays the details in a separate window.

To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile:

1. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave LinkProfile" on page 193.


3. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu.

4. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. A separate window opens displayingdetails of the selected point. (see Figure 7.113).

5. Move the pointer along the profile.

The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile:

- Distance: The distance from the transmitting site.- Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height.- Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is

relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the currentpoint.

- Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.- Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer.


Atoll User Manual

As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window, the pointer changes ( )to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window. When you place the pointer on thisspecial cursor, the following information appears in a tool tip:

- Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system.- Distance: The distance from the transmitting site,- Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height,- Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the line

of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point,- Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value,- Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer

7.4.1.6.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each PointYou can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selectedpoint along the microwave link profile.

Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. Atolldisplays the details in a separate window.

To display the profile data using the Values tab:


2. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu.

You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking theValues tab.

The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along theprofile:

- Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site,- Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files),- Clutter: the clutter class,- Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file,- Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model,- Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value- Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the

line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point,- Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (per-

centage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). This value is relative to the bottom of theFresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value.

Figure 7.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab



7.4.1.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile ValuesThe geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table. The reso-lution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres,where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps.

You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modificationsin the Profile tab.


• "Editing Profile Values" on page 197• "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198• "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199• "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199• "Importing Profile Values" on page 199• "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199• "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199

7.4.1.7.1 Editing Profile ValuesSome values (e.g., the altitude, the clutter class, the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table orusing the mouse.

To edit the profile values in the table:

1. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.

2. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field. You can edit the following columns:

- Altitude: The altitude (DTM)- Clutter: The clutter class- Clutter Height: The clutter height- Category: The clutter category.

3. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.

To edit profile values using the mouse:


2. Click the Edit button. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.115).

3. Right-click the profile view.

Figure 7.114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab

Figure 7.115: The Values tab when editing.


Atoll User Manual

4. Select Zoom In from the context menu.

5. In the profile, click one of the four corners of the area you want to select.

6. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button. Atoll zooms in on the selected area.

7. Select one of the following columns in the table:

- Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7.116).

i. Click the point you want to edit. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Drag the point to its new altitude.

- Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7.117).

i. Click the point you want to edit. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Drag the point to its new clutter height.

- Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7.118). The clutter classes are displayedwith lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are notdefined.

i. Click the line or point. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class.

- Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7.119). You can see lines sepa-rating the clutter categories.

i. Click the line. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category.

7.4.1.7.2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation ZonesWhen you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197, you can view reflection areas andvegetation zones.

Figure 7.116: Ground in edit mode.

Figure 7.117: Clutter heights in edit mode.

Figure 7.118: Clutter classes in edit mode.

Figure 7.119: Clutter categories in edit mode.



To display reflection areas and vegetation zones:



3. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu:

- Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in

the reflection analysis and reflecting paths. Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ).- Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area. You must already

have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes.

- Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones withfoliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. Zones with foliage are displayed with

with a pattern ( ).- Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view

vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. Vegetation

zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ).- Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones.

7.4.1.7.3 Copying and Pasting Profile ValuesYou can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude, clutter classes, clutter heights, and clutter categories in thetable.

To copy and paste profile values in the table:



3. Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

4. Copy into the selected cells:

- To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells, click the Actions button and select Paste.- To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells, press CTRL+D.- To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells, press CTRL+U.

7.4.1.7.4 Importing Profile ValuesYou can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab. Only editablevalues (i.e., altitude, clutter classes, clutter heights, and clutter categories) can be imported.

To import data into the table:



3. Click the Actions button and select Import. The Import dialogue appears.

4. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50.

7.4.1.7.5 Exporting Profile ValuesYou can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files.

To export profile values:



3. Click the Actions button and select Export. The Export dialogue appears.

4. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.

7.4.1.7.6 Saving the Edited Profile ValuesWhen you edit the data in the profile table, the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select anotherlink or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. If you want, you can save them in the link properties.

To save the edited profile values:



3. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link.

7.4.1.7.7 Refreshing the Profile ValuesYou can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values.

To restore the original link profile values:




Atoll User Manual

3. Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data.

7.4.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna HeightsWhen designing a microwave link network, you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-of-sight signal and reflections.

In Atoll, you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Anal-ysis Tool window, you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and pene-tration parameters displayed.

Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values.


• "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200• "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200• "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200.

7.4.2.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the MouseYou can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Micro-wave Link Analysis Tool window.

To modify antenna heights using the mouse:

1. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.

2. Click the antenna height pointer ( ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antennaheight.

3. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). The context menu appears.

4. Select Save Hx and Tilt, where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site, from the context menu. Atoll savesthe current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link.

7.4.2.2 Defining Microwave Antenna HeightsYou can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave LinkAnalysis Tool window.

To modify the antenna height:


2. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( ) and enter the exact antenna height.


4. Select Save Hx and Tilt, where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site, from the context menu. Atoll savesthe current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link.

7.4.2.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna HeightsAtoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions.

To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna:



3. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu. The Height Optimisation dialogue appears.

4. Select the optimisation method:

- Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnelellipsoid. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. Atollwill determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint.

Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to beexceeded. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Propertiesdialogue for each site. When defined, these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab.

Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to beexceeded. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Propertiesdialogue for each site. When defined, these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab.



If you have out-of-date clutter class maps, you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foli-age growth). Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutterheight.

- Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due tothe main obstacle (i.e., it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone).

5. Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin andkmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration.

6. Click OK.

7. Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.The contextmenu appears.

8. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities.

You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height. This enables you to prevent the antenna heightfrom being modified during the optimisation process. Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not locedas well) will be calculated to optimise the link. Furthermore, you can always restore the last antenna height valueby selecting Restore from the same menu.


10. Select Save Ha, Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwavelink.

This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles, i.e., it is not accessible for microwave linkprofiles involving one or more repeaters. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site micro-wave link profiles (e.g., Site Site B or Repeater P Site B).

7.4.3 Adding a Microwave Passive RepeaterPassive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. Passive repeaters divide theradio path into two branches, each traversing different type terrain, normally having different lengths and different inclina-tions. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading, distortions and rain etc. Dueto this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders".

Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites:

• No power is required• No regular road access is required• No equipment housing is needed• They are environmentally friendly• Little or no maintenance is required.

These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas.

There are two main types of passive repeaters. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connectedby a short feeder cable; these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. The second type is a plane reflectortype passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal; these are often called passive reflectorsor plane reflectors.

Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. The followingsections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters.

In Atoll, a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater."


• "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201.• "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202.• "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202.

7.4.3.1 Description of a Passive RepeaterThe parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. The Propertiesdialogue has two tabs:

• The General tab

- Name: The passive repeater name.- Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table).- Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position, if you wish.

- Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to thesite location, and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets, Dx and Dy, respectively.

- Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position, and thenenter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates, X and Y, respectively.

Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to beexceeded. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (OtherProperties tab). If defined, these height limits are represented on the Profile tab.


Atoll User Manual

- Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site.

You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( ) nextto the corresponding item.

• The Type tab

- Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater.

- For a reflector type repeater, define these parameters:

- Surface: The surface area for the repeater.- Height: The reflector height.- Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission.- Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission.

You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles.

- For a back-to-back antenna type repeater, define the following parameters:

- Under Antenna1, you can choose the antenna, define the antenna height, the azimuth and tilt angles to-wards the site of transmission.

- Under Antenna2, you can choose the antenna, define the antenna height, the azimuth and tilt angles to-wards the site of reception, and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation.

- Under Waveguide, you can choose the waveguide and define the length. By default, Atoll listswaveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. If you want, you can apply an

additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field. When the filter is active, the appear-

ance of the button changes ( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with theselected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table.

You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles.

7.4.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive RepeaterYou can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. You can access the properties ofa passive repeater, described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201, through the passive repeater’s Prop-erties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeateror modifying an existing passive repeater.

To create or modify a passive repeater:

1. If you are creating a new passive repeater:


b. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.


d. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu. The Passive Repeaters New Element Propertiesdialogue appears.



b. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.


d. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. The Passive Repeaters table appears.

e. Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table. The context menu appears.

f. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears.

3. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201.

4. Click OK.

7.4.3.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the MouseIn Atoll, you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a passive micro-wave repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site.

Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time, or modifying several existing passive repeaters, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by right-clicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.



Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. The following terms are used in Atoll forpassive repeaters and related parameters:

• Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively.• A part of the link is called a "Section." A section can be:

- One of the directions of a bi-directional link.- One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any).- For example:

- Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section, Site A Site B- Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections, Site A Site B and Site B Site A- Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections, Site A Site P, Site P Site Q, Site Q Site B, Site B Site Q,

Site Q Site P, Site P Site A.

To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse:

1. Select the microwave link. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directlyon the map.

2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.

3. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater youwant to create.

4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by the site symbol ( ).

Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table thatis assigned to the newly created repeater. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency bandassigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the direc-tions of the two sections of the microwave link.

For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater, see "Description of a PassiveRepeater" on page 201.

7.5 Analysing Microwave Link ReliabilityReliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessingits performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. Ideally, a microwave link shouldbe completely reliable 100% of the time. In practice, this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link duethe continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment.

The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annualbasis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. Reliability analysis takesinto consideration the parameters of fade margin, diffraction loss, average annual temperature, terrain roughness calcu-lations, radio parameters, antenna parameters, transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses.

A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully.


• "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203.• "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206.• "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208.

7.5.1 Analysing a Single Microwave LinkWhen you create a microwave link, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters.

Before analysing the microwave link reliability, you must assign a propagation model, define the microwave link class andrelated performance objectives and set the calculation parameters.

The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave linkpath. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. You can assign a prop-agation model to all microwave links at once, to a group of microwave links, or to a single microwave link. Assigning apropagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151.

Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwavelinks. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once, to a group of microwave links, or to a single microwavelink. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154.

Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimaticand reliability parameters defined per link. Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156.Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159.

Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater.


Atoll User Manual


• "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204• "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204.• "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205.• "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206.• "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206

7.5.1.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required MarginsAtoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined inthe link class. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Toolwindow.

To calculate the microwave link required margins:


2. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu.

This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default. This tab contains thereport generated after the calculation of required margins. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured asdescribed in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section.

Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information:

• Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name, location,altitude and coordinate system), the equipment installed at each site (name, compatible digital hierarchy, modu-lation used, capacity, rate, minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration), the operating frequency band of themicrowave link, its length and calculation parameters (propagation model, models for availability and quality cal-culations, whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account).

• Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calcula-tions, i.e., quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER) and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER).

• Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity.• Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive

fading, margin against enhancements, margin against discrimination reduction, calculated and required thermalfade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin.

• Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters,their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total requiredmargin.

• Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets,how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter.

7.5.1.2 Calculating a Microwave Link BudgetAtoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studiedmicrowave link as detailed below.

Moreover, the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. Therefore, it is possible to modify the propertiesof the microwave link, or the calculation parameters, and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Micro-wave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). Furthermore, any modifications made to the profile ofthe microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geog-raphy of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab.

To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link:


2. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu.

You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab.

The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied. Micro-wave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information:

• Summary: Under Summary, you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for bothdirections of the link and the specified BER values, a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average yeartaking into account both link quality and availability, a basic budget including the operating frequency band, thelink length, the thermal fade margin, the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in% of time), a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate directvisualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showingthe studied link and the surrounding area.

• Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design; site names, locations, and altitudes forboth extremities, repeaters (if any), antennas used at both sites with their respective models, heights, azimuths,tilts, gains, diameters and near fields, diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as themodels, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains and diameters, microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites withdetails such as the models, digital hierarchy employed, modulation used, data rates, minimal channel bandwidths,capacities and configurations.

• Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link includingthe EIRP, ATPC effects, transmitter powers, passive repeater gains (if any), total losses comprising filter losses,



connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, and waveguides and cable losses,polarisation at both sites, and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybethe central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band).

• Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions, the channel, the corresponding fre-quency, the polarisation, if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity, the trans-mission and reception port numbers, the port circulator and attenuator losses.

• Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit errorratios and sensitivities at the receivers, overflow thresholds, thermal noise, the required C/I and total losses atreception comprising filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, andwaveguides and cable losses.

• Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link isoperating, climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature, water vapour den-sity, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K.

• Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performedsuch as the calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability model, interference, ifenhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored, space diversity and frequency diversity), quality objec-tives (SESR, ESR, BBER), and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER).

• Propagation: the nominal received signal level, propagation results for both directions of the microwave linkincluding total attenuation, free space loss, losses due to dry air, losses due to water vapour, diffraction losses,vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation),antenna losses and tropospheric scattering, epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS).

• Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions,for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. These results include the outage prob-ability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR(required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the worst month (dispersive fading, selective fading,fading due to discrimination reduction, enhancement forecast).

• Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction,for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. These results include the outage prob-ability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR(required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the average year (rain fading, rain attenuation, fading dueto discrimination reduction).

• Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure.These results include availability of hot standby, outage probability due to faults for the average year and theoutage period for the average year and the performance objective.

This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" onpage 206.

7.5.1.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation ParametersYou can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options.

To modify analysis parameters for a link:

1. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab), click the Actions button. The context menu appears.

2. Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears.

3. You can set the following options:

- Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account, select the Take SpaceDiversity into Account check box and define the following:

- Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas.- Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas.

- Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account, select the TakeFrequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels.

- Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation intoaccount.

4. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters, click one of the following:

- Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and clickOK to close the dialogue.

- OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the reportwithout modifying the microwave link properties.

To modify calculation parameters for analysis:

1. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab), click the Actions button. The context menu appears.

2. Select Calculation Parameters. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. You can define thestudied port, BER values, etc., or change calculation models. For further information, see "Global Parameters" onpage 156.

3. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report.


Atoll User Manual

7.5.1.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report DisplayYou can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or allof the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles.

To configure the report display:

1. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab), click the Actions button and select Configure Report. The Report Configu-ration dialogue appears.

2. Click the Contents tab.

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category.

b. To display a result, select its check box.

c. To hide a result, clear its check box.

d. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available, select the Reset button.

3. Click the Style tab.

a. Click one style.

b. To change the font, select the AaBbYyZz button.

c. Choose how to align the paragraph. You can choose beween Align Left, Centred and Align Right.

d. To restore the initial style, select the Reset button.

4. Click OK.

7.5.1.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget ReportAfter you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs, you can print them or export them.

To print or export the report:

1. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab), click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu,

a. Select Print in order to print the link budget report.

b. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format.

7.5.2 Analysing Microwave LinksAtoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. Microwavelinks in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e.g., by frequency band). You canlaunch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. The results are displayed inthe form of a report. Before calculating one or more link budgets, you can create a computation zone. The computationzone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. When you create a computation zone, Atoll carriesout the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filterparameters), and intersect the computation zone.

The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a computationzone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorerwindow is selected. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.

When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network youare currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied, Atoll reduces both the timeand computer resources necessary for calculations.

If there is no computation zone defined, Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are activeand filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available.

For information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30.


• "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206• "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207• "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207• "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208

7.5.2.1 Setting a Microwave Link as ActiveOnce microwave links are set up within a network, you can decide whether or not to activate them. Quality, availability andinterference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report, you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.



microwave links). In the Explorer window, active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Links folder; inactive

links are displayed in grey ( ).

You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link asactive by activating them from the Links context menu.

To set an individual microwave link as active:




4. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. The context menu appears.

5. Select Active Link from the context menu. The transmitter is now active.

To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu:


2. Select the microwave links you want to set as active:

- To set all microwave links as active, right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. - To set a group of microwave links as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and right-

click the group of microwave links you want to set as active. The context menu appears.

3. Select Activate Links from the context menu. The selected microwave links are set as active.

To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table:



3. Select Open Table. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row.

4. For each microwave link that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Activate column.

Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active, you can set the propagation model and other calculationparameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters, see "Chapter6: Managing Calculations in Atoll".

7.5.2.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget ReportBefore calculating the link budget, you can define the content of the link budget report.

To define the content of the link budget report:



3. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.

Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report.

4. Define the content of the report:





to remove it.


c. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue.

5. Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report.

7.5.2.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link BudgetsYou can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links.

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as aconfiguration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering aname for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you configure areport, you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file withthe same settings you used this time.


Atoll User Manual

To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links:



3. Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu.

Atoll displays the link budget report. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selecteddirections (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link(sites, antennas and equipment installed), the signal level received, the fade margin, and its quality and availabil-ity. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP, various losses, etc.), reception parameters (sensitivity, variouslosses, etc.), calculation options, and geo-climatic parameters. It also details the propagation calculation (totalattenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air), unavailability due to rain, unavail-ability due to faults). All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied.

7.5.2.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation ValidityLink budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i.e., intermediate results such as propagation, outageprobabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. So, once calculations have been performed for all the links, you can quicklyperform a link budget for a group of links. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Calculationscan become invalid for different reasons:

• If a calculation method or option has been changed,• If microwave link properties have been modified,• If geographic data maps have been updated.

For the first two reasons, Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes therecalculation. In the last case (e.g., if you added a new clutter class map), you must force Atoll to recalculate.

To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget:



To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder:

- Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.

To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder:

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.

b. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. The context menuappears.

3. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu. Atoll removes existing calculations, includingvalid ones, and recalculates the link budget. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewerwindow.

7.5.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability AnalysisAtollMulti-hop microwave links, or multi-hops, are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to adestination. In general practice, microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes; to construct a microwave connectionover areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. Atollenables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops.


• "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208• "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210

7.5.3.1 Creating Multi-hopsIn Atoll, a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. A microwave link can be common to more than one multi-hop as well.


• "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209.• "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209.• "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209.• "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210.• "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210.

Notes

• You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) inthe toolbar.

• You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding recordin the report.



7.5.3.1.1 Creating a Multi-hopTo create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder:


2. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.

3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select New… from the context menu. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears.

5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab:

- Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll, but can be modified.- Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop

length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. Once you have selected a multi-hops

class, you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( ).- Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop.

6. Click OK. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder.

By default, Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX", where "X" incre-ments with each instance of a multi-hop link.

7. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.

8. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.

9. Select the Links tab.

10. Assign links to the multi-hop:

a. Select a link from the Link column.

b. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop.

11. Click OK.

7.5.3.1.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the MouseTo add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse:

1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link:

Either

a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folderopens.

c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.

d. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears.

Or

a. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link.

b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. The context menu appears.

2. Select Add a Link from the context menu. The pointer shape changes to in the map window.

3. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link.

The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.

7.5.3.1.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the MouseTo create a new multi-hop link using the mouse:

1. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. The pointer changes ( ).

2. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link.

3. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link.

4. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link.

The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. The next micro-wave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the siteparities).

Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multi-hops table.


Atoll User Manual

The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. If no site exists, Atoll will create newsites automatically at the location you click. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, transmitters, andpassive repeaters.

7.5.3.1.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links GloballyAtoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links .

To map multiple links to multi-hop links:



3. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. The Multi-Hop Links table appears,containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links. In this table, you can modify, delete,add, and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link.

7.5.3.1.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as ActiveYou can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. Quality and availability analyses only takeinto account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). In the Explorer window, active microwave

links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder; inactive links are displayed in grey ( ).

To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop:



3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.

4. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. The context menu appears.

5. Do one of the following:

- Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active.- Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive.

7.5.3.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability AnalysisAtoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. This calculation is based on the ITU-R530-5/8/10 recommendations.

To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link:


2. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button

3. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse. The context menu appears.

4. Select Analysis from the context menu. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears. It contains the followinginformation:

- Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link, total length of the multi-hoplink.

- Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of thelink.

- Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band, sub-band, channels, and polarisation of each trans-mitting site.

- Reception characteristics: reception thresholds, margins, quality (percentage over a month), availability(percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year).

- Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outageratio, monthly and annual outage periods, quality indicators (probabilities of SESR, ESR, BBER) compared tothe required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faultsand annual outage period.

7.6 Studying ReflectionStudying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver withenough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. The interference cangenerate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal.

In Atoll, you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impacton the received signal level. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model.

Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies, such as optic fibre links, are also supported in the calculation.



Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwavepropagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. For information on assigning clutter categor-ries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" onpage 151

Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. Therefore, the reflection analysis has tobe performed for different k factor values. For information on defining the range of k factor values, see "Modifying Reflec-tion Analysis Parameters" on page 214.


• "Displaying Reflection" on page 211.• "Analysing Reflections" on page 212.• "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215.

7.6.1 Displaying ReflectionAtoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflectedsignal. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signalis received at the receiver side (i.e. it is not obstructed).

To display reflection areas:

1. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.

2. Right-click the Profile tab. The context menu appears.

3. Select Display Reflections from the context menu.

Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined inthe Profile tab. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals byorange lines.

4. Click one reflection area. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path ifthere is one. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference.

- Green: Either there is no reflection point, or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. The reflection doesnot create destructive interference.

- Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed. The reflectiondoes not create destructive interference.

- Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side(i.e. the reflected signal is not obstructed). The reflection can create destructive interference.

You can display additional information regarding reflected paths.

To display additional information:



3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears.

4. In the Profile Display Options dialogue, select the Reflection tab.

5. Under For All Reflection Zones, you can select the following options:

- Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if youwant to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths. The option is automat-ically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above.

- Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zonewhen k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. Thereflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites; itis not based on the defined clutter categories. Then, you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and inthis case, if there is a reflection point within the reflection area.

6. Under For the selected area, you can select the following options:

- Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor rangecheck box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined rangeof k factor values. For information on defining the range of k factor values, see "Modifying Reflection AnalysisParameters" on page 214.

- Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you wantto display obstructed reflected signals. Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines.

- Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflectedsignals within the reflection area.

- Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflec-tion slope. This one is used to determine the reflection point.

7. Under Display tide levels, select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation dueto tides above the sea water clutter category. For information on defining the height variation, see "ModifyingReflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.


Atoll User Manual

7.6.2 Analysing ReflectionsIn this section, the following are explained:

• "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212.• "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214.• "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.

7.6.2.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis ReportAtoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links.

To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas:



3. Select Display Reflections from the context menu.

4. Click a reflection area.

5. Right-click the reflection area. The context menu appears.

6. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. The Study of reflections and diversitywindow appears. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab.

7. Select the Report tab.

The Report tab contains the following sections:

- Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. Ifrequired, Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiverantenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques.

In addition, it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for thek factor defined in the Profile tab.

- Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link:

- Longitude: The site position on the x-axis.- Latitude: The site position on the y-axis.- Height: The site altitude.- Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the .atl document.- Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties.- Length: The microwave link length.

- Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link:

- Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates.- Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre.- Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %.- Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab.- Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate.- Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99.99% of the aver-

age year in millimetre per hour.

- Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information:

- Ground Type: It can be either scattering, or reflecting, or intermediate. It depends on the roughness, thelength of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area. For more information onhow the ground type is determined, see the Technical Reference Guide.

- Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category. "Water or very wet" is considered forwet terrains, fresh and sea water clutter categories. "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open,tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry groundclutter categories.

- Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor.- Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area.

- Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information:

- Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length includingall reflection zones into brackets.

- Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflectionzone.

- Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on thereflection slope plane are complementary angles.

- Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths atSite A.

Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles, i.e., the profile should not include repeaters.



- Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths atSite B.

- Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value definedin the Profile tab:

- Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. The signal isattenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is re-flected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection).

- Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. This is the sum of theattenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection.

- Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. The signal attenuationis due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenua-tion due to refractivity).

- Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at thereceiver side.

Additional results appear if, when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection AnalysisReport" on page 214, you select the corresponding check boxes:

- Summary: Under Summary, you can select the following information:

- Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area, if the reflectedsignal is obstructed, and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase.

- <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diver-sity techniques for three k factor values (kmin, kavg and kmax). kavg corresponds to the k factor valuedefined in the Profile tab. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis ofthe Link dialogue. For information on defining the kmin and kmax, see "Modifying Reflection AnalysisParameters" on page 214.

- Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications, you can select the following information:

- <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table.- Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height, the support type and custom fields.- Antennas: Main, diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and

repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ).- Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB).- Terrain Profile: The terrain profile.

- Transmission: Under Transmission, you can select the following information:

- Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. For information on configuring the channel to be studied,see "Global Parameters" on page 156.

- Polarisation: The antenna polarisation.- Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used.

- Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters, you can select the following information:

- Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties.- Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties.- Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties.- Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties.- Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time. The value is calculated according

to refractivity conditions defined for the link.- Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99.9%): the k factor value observed 99.9% of time.- Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the

average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. The value is definedin the link properties.

- Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in thelink properties.

- Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°Cisotherm.

- Fog: the fog intensity in %. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file.

- Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters, you can select the following information:

- Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability mod-el, if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored, calculation on the diversity antenna, spacediversity and frequency diversity).

- Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER) to be considered for the link.- Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER) to be considered for the link.

- Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information:

- Permitivity: The terrain permitivity.- Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m.- Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor.- Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity.- <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin, kavg and

kmax). kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. kmin and kmax can be defined inthe Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. For information on defining the kmin andkmax, see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.

- Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor.


Atoll User Manual

- Divergence Factor: The divergence factor.

- Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry, you can select the following information:

- Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends.- Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection

plan.- Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin. Tau

corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength.If the difference is lower than 1, then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver sidedue to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided.If the difference exceeds or equals 1, then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the crit-ical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected andwhether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas.

- <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listedafter for three k factor values (kmin, kavg and kmax). kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in theProfile tab. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Linkdialogue. For information on defining the kmin and kmax, see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters"on page 214.

- Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A.- Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals.- Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns.

- Attenuations: Under Attenuations, you can select the following information:

- <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listedafter for three k factor values (kmin, kavg and kmax). kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in theProfile tab. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dia-logue. For information on defining the kmin and kmax, see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" onpage 214.

7.6.2.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis ReportYou can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used inthe calculations and results of the calculations with different styles.

To configure the reflection analysis report:

1. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212.

2. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. The Report Configuration dialogue appears.

3. Click the Contents tab.

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category.

b. To display a result, select its check box.

c. To hide a result, clear its check box.

d. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available, select the Reset button.

4. Click the Style tab.

a. Click a style.

b. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font.

c. Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left, Centred, or Align Right.

d. To restore the initial style, click the Reset button.

5. Click OK.

7.6.2.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis ParametersYou can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. In addition, you can access and modify theglobal calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters.

To define reflection analysis parameters:


2. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. The Parameters for Reflection Analysisof the Link dialogue appears.

3. Under Analysis Mode, select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis:

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report, you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.



- Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option, Atoll makes the reflection analysis onthe selected reflection area.

- Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option, Atoll takes into account all reflectionareas along the profile in the reflection analysis.

4. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan, select the method to be used to calculate antenna heightsabove the reflection plan. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regres-sion on the area. For more information on these calculation methods, see the Technical Reference Guide.

5. Under Terrain Height Irregularity, select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity. You canchoose between the Root Mean Square method, the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Rangemethod. For more information on these calculation methods, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6. Under Refractivity, select the range of k factor values:

- kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis.- kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis.

7. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water, select the Take into account height variations of check boxand define the corresponding height.

8. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray, select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signalamplitude. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coeffi-cient. For more information on these calculation methods, see the Technical Reference Guide.

9. Click OK.

To access the global calculation parameters:


2. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters.

To access the microwave link parameters:


2. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties.

7.6.3 Solutions Against ReflectionsAt the end of the reflection analysis, you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. In this case, effectsof reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" onpage 210, by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summarypart of the reflection analysis report, or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recom-mended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report.

Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separationsare valid over a range of k factor values. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations.

To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations:

1. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211.




5. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab.

6. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears.

By default, Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i.e. theattenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height, for different kfactor values (kmin, kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. You can also display the difference ofsignal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of:

- The k factor, for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies.- The transmission frequency, for different k factor values (kmin, kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna

heights.


Atoll User Manual


8. Under Vertical Axis, either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automaticallydetermine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis, or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation checkbox and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation).

9. Under Horizontal Axis, you can select the following:

- Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. You can choose between the receiverantenna height, the k factor and the transmission frequency.

- Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis.- Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis.

10. Under Graph Selection, select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them.

11. Click OK.

To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations:

1. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211.




5. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab.

6. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears.

7. Select the Variable Definition tab.

8. Under k Factor Selection, define the k factor values, kmin, kavg and kmax, to be considered for the analysis.For information, Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i.e. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year)and the keff factor at 50% (i.e. the median k factor value). You can redo the analysis with these values.

9. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection, define the antenna height values, Diversity Antenna, MainAntenna and Other Height, to be considered for the analysis. The optimal separations for the different k factorvalues are displayed. They are automatically calculated by Atoll. The value calculated for the kavg factor is usedto initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height - separation) and the other height (main antennaheight + separation) values. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations.

10. Under Transmission Frequency Selection, define the transmission frequency values, Diversity Frequency,Main Frequency and Other Frequency, to be considered for the analysis. The optimal separations calculated forthe different k factor values are displayed. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversityfrequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation). Youcan redo the analysis by considering other separations.

11. Click OK.

Atoll

7.7 Planning Microwave Link ChannelsPlanning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. For each new link created in any environment,there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. It is common experience that such modifi-cations in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during theinitial design of the same network. Thus, frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only forinterference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network.

The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the mostimportant objective. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. A logical approach is to define anumber of specific frequency plans, each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies, then divide each plan into ahigh segment and a low segment.

Figure 7.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph



The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs, with each pair having minimum separations.When an assignment is made, the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. If the transmitterfrequency is in the high block, the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa.


• "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217.• "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218.• "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218.• "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219.• "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220

7.7.1 Checking Microwave Link Site ParitiesYou can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave linkswhich are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and which intersect the computation zone.


• "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217• "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217.

7.7.1.1 Checking Site Parities on the MapAtoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts.

To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map:

1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window.

2. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.


4. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu. TheChannel Distribution dialogue appears.

5. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities.

6. Choose an icon for the different cases.

- Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.- Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band.- Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.- Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.

7. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi).

8. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend.

9. Click OK to start the calculations.

You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( )

button. Once the site parities are displayed on the map, you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( )button again. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu.

To hide the site parities using the context menu:




4. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu.

7.7.1.2 Creating a Report on Site ParitiesAtoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities.

To create a report displaying site parities:




4. Select Interference, Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. The ChannelDistribution dialogue appears.

5. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities.

6. Click OK.

Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Once Atoll hasfinished checking site parities, results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table.

The Channel Distribution table contains the following information.


Atoll User Manual

- Frequency Band: The operating frequency band.- Site: The name of the site.- Parity: The parity of the site.

- Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band.- Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.- Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.- Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.

- Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the sitehas a multiple parity.

- Longitude: The longitude of the site.- Latitude: The latitude of the site.

You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. For more information, see "Sorting Data in Tables" onpage 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62.

7.7.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel ReuseIn Atoll, you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on themap.

To find a channel using the Search Tool:

1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears.

2. Select the MW Channel tab.

3. Select a Frequency Band.

4. Select a Sub-band.

5. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel.

6. Select a Channel.

7. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered, select the Same Sub-bandOnly check box.

8. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed, select the Co-channel Only check box.

9. Click Search.

Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Links using an adjacent channel tothe selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue. Links using a channel which completely coversthe selected channel are displayed in orange. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selectedchannel are displayed in purple. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i.e., partially coversthe selected channel) are displayed in green. All other links are displayed in grey.

If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box, links using the selected channel in the same sub-band aredisplayed in red; links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed inblue and all others are displayed in grey.

If you selected the Co-channel Only check box, links using the selected channel in the same sub-band aredisplayed in red; links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange; linksusing a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple; links using a channelwhich overlaps the selected channel (i.e., partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and allother links are displayed in grey.

The Search Tool window provides you with the following options:

- To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window.- To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency

Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window.

7.7.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel SearchThe semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to findthe best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. This channel search is performed according to the interfer-ence received or transmitted per channel.

To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link:

1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.The context menu appears.

2. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dia-logue appears.

3. Click the Conditions tab and define the following:

- Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A -Site B, Site B - Site A, or both).



Under Channels to Study:

- Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from tothe frequency band of the microwave link being studied.

- Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (theopposite half-band is assigned to the reception site).

- The channels to be analysed:

- Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated.- If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated, select Restrict the list of potential

channels and define the channels available. You can enter or paste a list of channels; the values mustbe separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of channelsavailable, by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22.

- The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and eachdefined polarisation (either horizontal, or vertical, or horizontal and vertical).

- Under Channel Weightings, use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels.

4. Click the Parameters tab and define:

- The earth curvature factor (k factor).- The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites.- The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers; this is the per-

centage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. In order to take into account all thepotential interferers, set the parameter to 3000%.

- The minimum threshold degradation.- Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal.- Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on, always off

or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation.

5. Click Calculate to launch the calculations.

The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. Thisimplies that the best available channels, in terms of the related costs, are the ones listed on top of the list. It is then possiblethrough this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking theCommit button.

7.7.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum AnalyserAtoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allo-cate unused or less used channels where required. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels usedalong with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Through this graph, you can find the channelswith least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links.

To open the spectrum analyser:


2. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Micro-wave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.121):

Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the micro-wave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. The red line shows the total noise level received onthe interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel.

You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels whererequired.

Figure 7.121: The I Level on the Band tab - Received Interference Levels Option

Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. If there are more than one interfering signals, only the peak value is displayed on the graph.


Atoll User Manual

You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab:

- Hop: Select the hop to be studied, i.e., Site A Site B or vice versa.- Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation prod-

ucts. For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products, see “Displaying Third-order Inter-modulation Products” on page 220.

- Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Proper-ties dialogue of the studied microwave link.

- Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menuin order to define global calculation parameters. For information on global parameters, see “Global Parame-ters” on page 156.

- Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levelson the Band tab.

7.7.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation ProductsIntermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used. Non-linear systems generateharmonics, meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e.g., f1), then the output is asignal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i.e., 2f1, 3f1, 4f1, 5f1, etc.). Intermodulationoccurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies. The signals of different frequenciesare mixed together, forming additional signals at frequencies that are not, in general, at harmonic frequencies of either.These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs).

Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. They are important because they fall within the vicinity of theoriginal frequency components, and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour.

To calculate third-order intermodulation products:


2. Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu. The I Levels on the Band tab of theMicrowave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.122):

Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i.e., Site A if you selected SiteA - Site B or Site B if you selected Site B - Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for eachtransmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link. Frequencies are represented by verticallines and reported on the horizontal axis. Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave linkare represented. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission; green lines show the frequenciesused for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products. Atoll displays a tool tip whenyou place the mouse cursor on each vertical line.

You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab:

- Hop: Select the hop to be studied, i.e., Site A Site B or vice versa.- Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels

used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. For information on displayingthe received interference levels, see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219.

- Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Proper-ties dialogue of the studied microwave link.

- Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menuin order to define global calculation parameters. For information on global parameters, see “Global Parame-ters” on page 156.

- Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed reporton the calculated intermodulation products. The report contains the following information:- The studied microwave link and the selected hop.- The studied site, i.e., Site A if you selected Site A - Site B or Site B if you selected Site B - Site A.- The transmission frequencies used by the site.- The reception frequencies used by the site.- The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band.- A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab.

Figure 7.122: The I Level on the Band tab - Intermodulations Option



- Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levelson the Band tab.

7.8 Analysing InterferenceAtoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. Interferencecalculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group oflinks. Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filterparameters), and intersect the computation zone.

For information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30.

You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius, received interferer signalthreshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links.

By default, the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. However, you canchange the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab.

When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link, Atoll searches for potential interferers in the networkoperating in the same frequency band. Potential interferers, among all microwave links in the network, are the active andfiltered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone andwhose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. Atoll also considers the adjacencyof frequency bands, i.e., microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequencyband of the microwave link being studied.

The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference:

• Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on, always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation.• IRFs defined on the IRF table if available• T/I curve, transmitter mask, and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs.• Polarisation and equipment signatures.• Co-channel and adjacent channel interference.


• "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221.• "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224.• "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224.• "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225.• "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226.• "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226.

7.8.1 Interference Reduction FactorAs the name indicates, the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal.The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal.You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protec-tion levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).

The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. When studying the interferencebetween transmission equipment and reception equipment, Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for thetransmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If so, Atoll uses it. Otherwise, Atoll determines the IRFgraph during the process of calculating interference. Atoll proceeds as follows:

1. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacityand modulation. If so, Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined forthe equipment if available, or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs, see"Theoretical Graphs" on page 136).

2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity, or modulation are not the same, Atoll merges the transmitter mask andthe receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for theequipment if available, or the theoretical graphs if not.


• "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221• "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222.

The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll.

7.8.1.1 Defining IRF Graphs ManuallyYou can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victimand interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference.

To create or modify an IRF graph:





Atoll User Manual

4. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. The Trunk Types table appears (seeFigure 7.123).

5. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list.

6. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.

7. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7.124).

8. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (inMHz). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.

9. Click OK.

7.8.1.2 Defining IRF Graphs with the AssistantAtoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Whenyou select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band,Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference.

To use the assistant to define IRFs:




4. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (seeFigure 7.123).

Figure 7.123: IRF table

Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph, use the row marked with the New Row icon ( )

Figure 7.124: IRF record Properties dialogue



5. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayedin the grid.

6. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufac-turer are displayed in the grid.

7. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufac-turer are displayed in the grid.

8. You can now define an IRF graph, delete an IRF graph, or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theo-retical graphs:

To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment:


b. Select Add Record from the context menu. A dialogue appears.

c. Under Enter graph values, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The resultinggraph is displayed on the right of the dialogue.

d. Click OK.

To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment:


b. Select Delete from the context menu.

To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoreticalgraphs:


b. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears.

Figure 7.125: IRF Setting dialogue


Atoll User Manual

c. Under Transmitter Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined forthe equipment, or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequencyband of the transmission equipment.

d. Under Reception Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for theequipment, or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band ofthe reception equipment.

e. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz).

f. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph.

g. Click OK.

9. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue.

7.8.2 Using IRF in Interference CalculationsAs explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221, the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during theinterference calculation. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment, Atollfirst checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment - reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If defined,it uses it. Else, it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. It proceeds as follows:

1. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacity andmodulation. In this case, Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs definedfor equipment if available, or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not.

2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity or modulation are not the same, Atoll merges the transmitter mask andthe receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs defined for equipmentif available, or the theoretical graphs if not.

7.8.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave LinkAtoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. You can easily define the param-eters for studying each microwave link, visualise the results in the form of reports and tables, and view the interferenceconnections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively.

To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link:


2. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu. A dialogue containing details of the interferenceanalysis appears. The results are displayed in the following tabs:

- Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over anygiven microwave link. The report includes the following information:- Summary: A summary of the link being studied, its operating frequency band, length, thermal fade

margin, worst month quality, average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives arereached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Finally, a global link estimation takinginto account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year.

- Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design; site names, locations, and alti-tudes for both extremities, repeaters (if any), antennas used at both sites with their respective models,heights, azimuths, tilts, gains, diameters and near fields, diversity antennas and repeater back-to-backantennas details such as the models, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains and diameters, microwave transceiverequipment installed at both sites with details such as the models, digital hierarchy employed, modulationused, data rates, minimal channel bandwidths, capacities and configurations.

- Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave linkincluding the EIRP, ATPC effects, transmitter powers, passive repeater gains (if any), total lossescomprising filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, andwaveguides and cable losses, polarisation at both sites, and the port and the channel for which the calcu-lations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequencyband).

- Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions, the channel, the corre-sponding frequency, the polarisation, whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel forfrequency diversity, the transmission and reception port numbers, the port circulator and attenuatorlosses.

- Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including thebit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers, overflow thresholds, thermal noise thresholds, therequired C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses, connection losses, shared losses,shielding losses, port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses.

- Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which thelink is operating, climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature,water vapour density, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimaticfactor K.

- Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have beenperformed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability model,



interference, whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored, space diversity andfrequency diversity), quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER), and availability objectives (SESR, ESR,BBER).

- Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control,minimum threshold degradation, maximum distance, correlation area, interfered useful bandwidth) andresults of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation, nominal receivedcarrier power level, total interference in clear-air, threshold degradation for rain, total interference in rainand C/I).

- Propagation: The nominal received signal level, propagation results for both directions of the microwavelink including total attenuation, free space loss, losses due to dry air, losses due to water vapour, diffrac-tion losses, vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the totalattenuation), antenna losses and tropospheric scattering, epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS).

- Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in bothdirections, for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. These resultsinclude the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, theoutage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performanceobjectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the worst month(dispersive fading, selective fading, fadings due to discrimination reduction, enhancement forecast), ifspace and frequency diversities are used.

- Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in bothdirections, for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. These resultsinclude the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, theoutage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performanceobjectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the averageyear (rain fading, rain attenuation, fading due to discrimination reduction).

- Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equip-ment failure. These results include availability of hot standby, outage probability due to failures for theaverage year, the outage period for the average year and the performance objective.

- Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave linkbeing studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being stud-ied.

- Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studiedalong with relevant details of the interference study.

- Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link beingstudied along with relevant details of the interference study.

7.8.4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave LinksAtoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network ofmicrowave links. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define.


• "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207.• "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207.

7.8.4.1 Defining the Content of the Interference ReportBefore calculating interference on multiple microwave links, you can define the content of the interference report.

To define the content of the interference report:



3. Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.

Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report.

4. Define the content of the report:





to remove it.



Atoll User Manual

c. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue.

5. Click OK.

7.8.4.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave LinksYou can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. You can also perform interference analysisover the entire network of microwave links.



3. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu. Atoll displays the interference report. This report lists theresults for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BERvalues.

You can view details of each microwave link, by double-clicking the record in the report. The details are displayedin a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysison a Single Microwave Link" on page 224.

7.8.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations, performed on a group of microwave links, are saved in the Atoll document. So, once calculationshave been performed for all the links, you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links.Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons:

• If a calculation method or option has been changed,• If microwave link properties have been modified,• If geographic data maps have been updated.

For the first two reasons, Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes therecalculation. In the last case (e.g., if you added a new clutter class map), you must force Atoll to recalculate.

To force Atoll to recalculate interference:



To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder:

- Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.

To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder:

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.

b. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. The contextmenu appears.

3. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu. Atoll removes existing calculations, includingvalid ones, and recalculates interference. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewerwindow.

You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Rein-itialise. Atoll removes existing calculations, including valid ones.

7.8.6 Displaying Interference on the MapAfter calculating interference on a microwave link, you can display the result on the map.

To display interference connections on the map

1. Click the microwave link on the map.

2. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar.

Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as aconfiguration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering aname for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you configure aninterference report, you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open yourconfiguration file with the same settings you used this time.

Notes:

• You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) inthe toolbar.

• You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding recordin the Victim/Interferer tabs.



The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed onthe map. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards andoutwards pointing arrows respectively. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neitherinterfering with the link nor being interfered by it. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button

( ) again.

When the interference connections are displayed on the map, you can use the tool tip to show further information abouteach interference connection by placing the cursor on it.

You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map.




4. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. The Interference dialogue opens.

You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and selectif you want to make them visible.

7.9 Advanced Configuration

7.9.1 Point-to-Multipoint LinksA point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwavelinks must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites.


• "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227.• "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228.• "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229.• "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229.• "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229.• "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230.• "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230.• "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230.• "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230.• "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231

7.9.1.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint LinkIn Atoll, a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters)connected to a hub. You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways:

• using the mouse, • using the point-to-multipoint link folder, or • editing the point-to-multipoint links table.

The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites, created auto-matically at the location you clicked on the map. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, transmitters, andpassive repeaters.

To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse:

1. Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to ( ).

2. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link.

3. Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. If you do not click an existing site, Atoll creates a newsite where you click.

4. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link.

To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder:



3. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select New from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears.

5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab:

- Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll, but can be modified.- Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Once you

have selected a frequency band, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ).


Atoll User Manual

- Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Once you have selected

the hub site, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ).- Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA.- Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters.- Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link.

6. Click OK. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder.

To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230

To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table:




4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint table appears.

5. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. The followingfields must be filled: Name, Frequency Band, and Site.

6. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230.

By default, Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX", where "X" increments with the creation of eachnew point-to-multipoint link.

7.9.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link PropertiesYou can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filteredpoint-to-multipoint links.


• "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228• "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228.

7.9.1.2.1 Modifying Global PropertiesTo manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally:




4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears.

5. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue:

- General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organisepoint-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group, sort, and filter tools.

- Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents, including user-defined fields, of the point-to-multipointtable.

- Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their

attributes, to manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool .

6. Click OK.

7.9.1.2.2 Modifying Individual PropertiesTo edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link:

1. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link:

On the Data tab of the Explorer window:


b. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.

c. Click the button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.

d. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears.



On the map:

a. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. The point-to-

multipoint icon changes ( ).

b. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. The context menu appears.


3. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue:

- General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organisemulti-hops by using Atoll’s group, sort, and filter tools.

- Links: The Links tab lets you add, edit, and delete microwave links.- Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on

the map.- An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table.

7.9.1.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as ActiveYou can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. In the Explorer window, active

microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder; inactive links are displayed in grey ( ).

To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link:



3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder.

4. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set. The context menu appears.

5. Select one of the following:

- Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active.- Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive.

7.9.1.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links GloballyTo map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally:



3. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears.

4. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. The PMP/Link Mapping table opens, containing all the point-to-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. In this table, you can modify, delete, and add the linksthat make up a point-to-multipoint link.

7.9.1.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint LinkBefore you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave link must first exist betweenthe site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. For information on creating links, see "Definition of aMicrowave Link" on page 185.

To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link:



3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.

4. Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogueappears.

5. Select the Links tab.

6. In the row with the new row icon ( ), select a link.

7. Click OK. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link.

Note: Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. Do not select the site

icon ( ).


Atoll User Manual

7.9.1.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the MouseBefore you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave link must first exist betweenthe site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. For information on creating links, see "Definition of aMicrowave Link" on page 185.

To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse:




4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears.

5. Select Add a Link from the context menu. The pointer shape changes ( ).

6. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. The microwave link is addedto the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link.

7.9.1.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint LinkTo delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link:

1. On the map, select the microwave link you want to delete.

2. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears.

3. Select Delete from the context menu. The microwave link is deleted.

7.9.1.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint LinkTo delete a point-to-multipoint link:

1. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete:

Either



c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.

d. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. The context menu appears.

Or

a. On the map, select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete.

b. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears.

When selecting a point-to-multipoint link, be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link.

Do not select the site icon ( ).

2. Select Delete from the context menu. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted.

You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table. Delet-ing a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or trans-mitters relating to that site.

7.9.1.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint HubWhen a microwave link consists of only two sites, the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. In a point-to-multipoint link, it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. Conse-quently, the height, azimuth, and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas.

Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created.However, after the point-to-multipoint has been created, other factors such as the addition of new microwave links maymean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna.

To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna:




4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. The context menuappears.

Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site.





7. In the "Antenna" subsection, click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. A dialogue appears withthe recalculated height, azimuth, and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna.

8. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated, the point-to-multipoint link antennas mayneed to be adjusted accordingly. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hubantenna on the link antennas, select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box.

9. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas.

7.9.1.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the MouseTo use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna:

1. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( ) and you cannow rotate it manually.

2. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth.


Atoll User Manual


Index

Index

Aantenna

antenna patterns, copying (MW) 126

antenna patterns, printing (MW) 126

antennas, importing (MW) 125, 132

changing relative position on the map 20

compatibility with equipment (MW) 138, 139

compatibility with equipment, assistant (MW) 139, 140

heights, adjusting (MW) 200

heights, adjusting automatically (MW) 200

heights, optimising (MW) 200

microwave 123

microwave antenna properties 125

microwave, creating 123

point-to-multipoint link, adjusting 230

point-to-multipoint link, adjusting with the mouse 231

single antenna patterns, editing (MW) 125

archiving

all modifications to the database 87

only site data to the database 87

automatic backup 90

configuring 90

recovering a backup 91

availability objectives

microwave links, defining 156

Bbackup 90

configuring 90

recovering a backup 91

BER graphs

creating (MW) 136

budget

configuring report (MW) 206

multiple microwave links, calculating for 206, 225

single microwave link, calculating for 204

Ccables

creating (MW) 137

microwave 137

channel search, semi-automatic (MW) 218

clearance, displaying for microwave links 194

column headers

formatting 45

columns

changing width 45

displaying 46

freezing 46

hiding 46

moving 46

unfreezing 46

computation zone

drawing 30

editing 34

Fit to Map Window 30

importing 30

polygon, creating from 30

Connection Properties 85

context menu 17

renaming objects 17

coordinate system 81

setting 82

coordinates, searching by 73

coverage prediction

exporting results 37

geogrphic export zone, defining 33

report, displaying using focus zone 31

report, displaying using hot spot zone 31

coverage predictions

restricting sites studied (MW) 192

cursors 40

CW Measurement Analysis Tool

printing data 56

DData tab 15

data tables

adding a field 42

changing column width 45

changing row height 45

copying data 47

deleting a field 43

displaying columns 46

editing 43

exporting data 49

filtering 60

filtering by selection 62

filtering by several criteria 63

filtering, examples 64

formatting column headers 45

formatting table columns 45

freezing columns 46

hiding columns 46

importing data 50

moving columns 46

opening 41

opening record properties from table 44

pasting data 47

printing 52

restoring after filtering 64

sorting 60


Atoll User Manual

sorting by one column 61

sorting by several columns 61

unfreezing columns 46

viewing properties 42

XML files, exporting to 51

XML files, importing from 52

database

archiving all modifications 87

archiving only site data 87

connecting to 84

Connection Properties 85

creating a document from 84

refreshing document 86

resolving data conflicts 88

working with 83

digital hierarchy 132

display

changing properties 21

defining display type 22

display type, discrete values 22

display type, unique 22

display type, value intervals 22

display coordinate system 81

Distance Measurement tool 28

document

creating from database 79, 84

creating from template 79, 80

geographic data 79

information needed to create 79

microwave data 79

microwave equipment 79

refreshing from the database 86

setting basic parameters 81

document templates, see "templates"

DTM maps representing different areas 111

Eequipment

compatibility with antennas (MW) 138, 139

compatibility with antennas, assistant (MW) 139, 140

importing (MW) 132

transceiver, properties of (MW) 131

Explorer window 15

Data tab 15

Geo tab 15

layers 16

Modules tab 15

using tabs 15

Ffield

adding to a table 42

deleting from a table 43

filter

site list, using for 69

transmitter list, using for 69

filtering

data tables by selection 62

data tables by several criteria 63

examples 64

restoring after filtering 64

using a polygon 29, 71

with subfolders 71

filtering zone

deleting 33

drawing 29


importing 30


Find toolbar 72

focus zone

creating 31

editing 34

explanation 31


importing 31


using to display coverage prediction report 31

folder configuration 69

applying a saved configuration 70

creating 70

deleting 71

exporting 70

importing 70

reapplying current configuration 70

frequency bands

long-haul (MW) 145

medium-haul (MW) 146

microwave 146

short-haul (MW) 146

frequency planning (MW) 216

frequency sub-bands

microwave 147

GGeo tab 15

geographic export zone

creating 33


importing 34


grouping 56

by a property 56, 57

by several properties 58

examples 59

with subfolders 71

Hhot spot zone

creating 31

editing 34

explanation 31


importing 31

using to display coverage prediction report 31


Index

Iinterference analysis

several links (MW) 226

single link (MW) 224

interference analysis (MW) 221

interference reduction factor

table (MW) 134, 221

using assistant (MW) 135, 139, 140

interference reduction factor (MW) 133, 221

IRF, see "interference reduction factor"

Llabel 23

Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81

layers 16

legend

adding object type 24

displaying 24

displaying Legend window 29

printing Legend window 56

line of sight area

intersection of areas (MW) 184

studying (MW) 176, 178, 179

line of sight area (MW) 176

lines

editing 34

link, point-to-multipoint, see point-to-multipoint links

Location Finder

searching by coordinates 73

searching by text property 73

long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145

Mmanufacturers (MW) 123

map

centring on a selected object 28

exporting as image 40

measuring distances 28

moving 27

printing 52

refreshing display 72

saving as image 39

Map toolbar 74

measurement units, setting 82

measuring distances on the map 28

medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146

microwave error performance events 155

microwave error performance objectives 155

microwave error performance parameters 155

Microwave Link Analysis

printing 56

Microwave Link toolbar 75

microwave links 173

antenna heights, adjusting 200

antenna heights, adjusting automatically 200

antenna heights, optimising 200

antenna patterns, copying 126

antenna patterns, printing 126

antenna properties 125

antenna/equipment compatibility 138, 139

antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139, 140

antennas 123

antennas, creating 123

antennas, importing 125, 132

availability objectives, defining 156

budget, calculating for multiple links 206, 225

budget, calculating for single link 204

budget, configuring report 206

cables 137

cables, creating 137

calculation parameters 156

calculation parameters, modifying 205, 214

classes, creating 154

classes, modifying 154

clearance, displaying 194

equipment, importing 132

error performance events 155

error performance objectives 155

error performance parameters 155

finding by site 58

frequency bands 146

frequency planning 216

frequency sub-bands 147

global properties, defining 156

grouping by site 58

interference analysis 221

interference on a single link, analysing 224

interference on several links, analysing 226

interference reduction factor 133, 221

LOS between sites, intersection 184

LOS between sites, studying 176, 178, 179

microwave ITU-R P.452 model 153

microwave propagation model 151

multi-hop links, mapping simple links to 210

multi-hop, creating 208

passive repeater 201

passive repeater, inserting (MW) 203

performance objectives 154

point-to-multipoint link 227

point-to-multipoint links, mapping links to 229

profile analysis 193

quality objectives, defining 155

reliability analysis 203

required margins, calculating 204

restricting sites studied 192

semi-automatic channel search 218

simple link, creating 190

simple link, setting as active 206

simple links 185

single antenna patterns, editing 125

site parity 217

site parity, creating a report on 217

site parity, displaying on the map 217

sorting by site 58

spectrum analyser 219

studying LOS between sites 176


Atoll User Manual

template field, adding 191

template field, deleting 191

template field, modifying 191

template, deleting 191

transceiver equipment, properties of 131

trunk types, creating 132

waveguides 137

waveguides, creating 137

workflow 173

Microwave Propagation Model

defining parameters 151, 153

microwave radio links

template 79

Modules tab 15

multi-hop links 208

adding links to 209

creating 208

links, mapping to 210

reliability analysis 210

multipoint link, see point-to-multipoint link

multi-user environment 83

Oobjects

changing transparency 23

deleting 17

displaying 16

displaying properties 18

grouping 56

grouping by a property 56, 57

grouping by several properties 58

grouping, examples 59

hiding 16

label 23

tip text 24

visibility scale 23

PPage Setup, see "printing"

Panoramic window 14, 27

passive microwave repeaters

creating 202

performance objectives

microwave links 154

Point Analysis window

printing 56

points

editing 34

point-to-multipoint link

adding a link 229, 230

creating 227

mapping links 229

properties 228

point-to-multipoint links 227

adding links 229

antenna, adjusting 230

antenna, adjusting with the mouse 231

creating 227

deleting 230

deleting a link from 230

global properties 228

links, adding on the map 230

links, mapping to 229

properties 228

polygon

deleting polygon filter 33

drawing a polygon filter 29

editing 34

focus zone, using as 31

geographic export zone, using as 34

printing zone, using as 54

using as computation zone 30

using as filter 29, 71

using as filtering zone 30

printing

antenna patterns (MW) 126

CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56

data tables and reports 52

defining print layout 54

docking windows 56

Legend window 56

map 52

Microwave Link Analysis 56

Point Analysis window 56

print preview 55

profile analysis (MW) 195

recommendations 53

Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56

printing zone

drawing 53


importing 54


profile analysis

microwave 193

options (MW) 194

printing (MW) 195

reflections, studying (MW) 210

Values tab (MW) 196

viewing (MW) 193

profile values

exporting data 199

importing data 199

projection coordinate system 81

Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81

Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81

propagation model

microwave ITU-R P.452 model 153

microwave propagation model 151

Microwave Propagation Model, defining parameters 151, 153

properties

changing display 21

grouping objects by 56, 57

switching between property dialogues 18


Index

Qquality objectives

microwave links, defining 155

Rredo 72

reflection analysis report

display (MW) 214

reflections

studying (MW) 210

refresh 72

from the database 86

reliability analysis (MW) 203

renaming 17

default object names 17

repeaters

passive repeater (MW) 201

passive repeater, inserting (MW) 203

reports

printing 52

required margins, calculating (MW) 204

row height

changing 45

rulers

displaying 28

Sscale level, choosing 27

Search toolbar 75

searching for map objects 72, 73

short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146

site

moving on the map 19

moving to a higher location 19

properties, accessing from the Explorer window 18

properties, accessing from the map 18

site list 67

adding 68

adding site 68

creating 68

editing 69

filter, using as 69

site parity, microwave link 217

creating a report 217

displaying on the map 217

sorting

sorting tables by one column 61

sorting tables by several columns 61

with subfolders 71

spectrum analyser (MW) 219

Standard toolbar 74

station template

creating (MW) 191

modifying (MW) 191

subfolders

creating 71

Ttable columns

formatting 45

tables, see "data tables"

templates 79

deleting (MW) 191

field, adding (MW) 191

field, deleting (MW) 191

field, modifying (MW) 191

microwave radio links 79

Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool

printing 56

tip text 24

tool tips, see "tip text"

toolbar

icons 74

Map 74

Microwave Link 75

Search 75

Standard 74

Vector Edition 75

transceiver equipment

properties of (MW) 131

transmitter list 67

adding 68

adding transmitter 68

creating 68

editing 69

editing filter 69

transparency, changing 23

trunk types, microwave

creating 132

Uundo 72

Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81

user configuration 66

creating 67

exporting 67

importing 67

VVector Edition toolbar 75

visibility scale 23

Wwaveguides

creating (MW) 137

waveguides and cables, microwave

creating 137

waveguides, microwave 137

windows

cascading 14

docking 14

floating 14

XXML


Atoll User Manual

exporting data tables to 51

importing data tables from 52

Zzooming

choosing a scale 27

in on a specific area 27



Head Office

7, rue des Briquetiers31700 Blagnac - FranceTel: +33 562 747 210Fax: +33 562 747 211

US Office

200 South Wacker Drive - Suite 3100Chicago, IL 60606 - USATel: +1 312 674 4846Fax: +1 312 674 4847

China Office

Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower,Jiadu Commercial Building,No. 66 Jianzhong Road,Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone,Guangzhou, 510665, P. R. of ChinaTel: +86 20 8553 8938Fax: +86 20 8553 8285

www.forsk.com

User Manual

Microwave Links

version 2.8.3AT283_UMM_E2

December 2010

http://www.forsk.com